FCC ID: OWDTR-0133-E XL-200P, Multi-Band Portable Land Mobile Radio

 

Rhein Tech Laboratories, Inc. 360 Herndon Parkway Suite 1400 Herndon, VA 20170 http://www.rheintech.com Appendix P: Manuals Client: Harris Corporation Model: XL-200P Portable Radio IDs: - OWDTR-0133-E/3636B-0133 Standards: FCC 22/74/80/90/IC RSS-119 Report #: 2014103 Please refer to the following pages for the Operators Manual and the Product Safety Manual. 510 of 520 Operators Manual 14221-1800-2000 Feb/15 XL-200P Full-Spectrum Multiband Radio 14221-1800-2000 REV.

-

DATE Feb/15 Initial release. MANUAL REVISION HISTORY REASON FOR CHANGE ACKNOWLEDGEMENT This product was developed using GEOTRANS, a product of the National Geospatial Intelligence Agency and U.S. Army Engineering Research and Development Center. Use of this software does not indicate endorsement or approval of the product by the Secretary of Defense or the National Geospatial Intelligence Agency. This device made under license under one or more of the following US patents: 4,590,473; 4,636,791; 5,148,482; 5,185,796; 5,271,017;

5,377,229; 4,716,407; 4,972,460; 5,502,767; 5,146,697; 5,164,986; 5,185,795. The Advanced Multi-Band Excitation implementation 2 (AMBE+2) voice coding Technology embodied in this product is protected by intellectual property rights including patent rights, copyrights and trade secrets of Digital Voice Systems, Inc. This voice coding Technology is licensed solely for use within this Communications Equipment. The user of this Technology is explicitly prohibited from attempting to extract, remove, decompile, reverse engineer, or disassemble the Object Code, or in any other way convert the Object Code into a human-readable form. U.S. Patent Nos. #5,870,405, #5,826,222, #5,754,974, #5,701,390, #5,715,365, #5,649,050, #5,630,011,

#5,581,656, #5,517,511, #5,491,772, #5,247,579, #5,226,084 and #5,195,166. CREDITS Harris, assuredcommunications, Unity, VIDA, EDACS, NetworkFirst, and OpenSky are registered trademarks of Harris Corporation. Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc. Motorola is a registered trademark of Motorola, Inc. AMBE is a registered trademark and IMBE, AMBE+, and AMBE+2 are trademarks of Digital Voice Systems, Inc. All brand and product names are trademarks, registered trademarks, or service marks of their respective holders. NOTICE!

The material contained herein is subject to U.S. export approval. No export or re-export is permitted without written approval from the U.S. Government. Rated: EAR99; in accordance with U.S. Dept. of Commerce regulations 15CFR774, Export Administration Regulations. Information and descriptions contained herein are the property of Harris Corporation. Such information and descriptions may not be copied or reproduced by any means, or disseminated or distributed without the express prior written permission of Harris Corporation, PSPC Business, 221 Jefferson Ridge Parkway, Lynchburg, VA 24501. Repairs to this equipment should be made only by an authorized service technician or facility designated by the supplier. Any repairs, alterations or substitutions of recommended parts made by the user to this equipment not approved by the manufacturer could void the user's authority to operate the equipment in addition to the manufacturer's warranty. This product conforms to the European Union WEEE Directive 2012/19/EU. Do not dispose of this product in a public landfill. Take it to a recycling center at the end of its life. This manual is published by Harris Corporation without any warranty. Improvements and changes to this manual necessitated by typographical errors, inaccuracies of current information, or improvements to programs and/or equipment, may be made by Harris Corporation at any time and without notice. Such changes will be incorporated into new editions of this manual. No part of this manual may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, including photocopying and recording, for any purpose, without the express written permission of Harris Corporation. Copyright 2015 Harris Corporation. 2 14221-1800-2000 TABLE OF CONTENTS 3. 2.4 2.3 1.3 2.1 2.2 1.1 1.2 Section Page 1. REGULATORY AND SAFETY INFORMATION ............................................................................. 7 SAFETY CONVENTIONS .......................................................................................................... 7 SAFETY TRAINING INFORMATION ...................................................................................... 7 1.2.1 RF Exposure Guidelines .................................................................................................. 8 1.2.2 Electromagnetic Interference/Compatibility .................................................................... 9 REGULATORY APPROVALS ................................................................................................... 9 1.3.1 Part 15 .............................................................................................................................. 9 1.3.2 Industry Canada ............................................................................................................... 9 1.4 OPERATING TIPS ...................................................................................................................... 9 1.4.1 Efficient Radio Operation ................................................................................................ 9 2. RENSEIGNEMENTS SUR LA RGLEMENTATION ET SCURIT ....................................... 11 CONVENTIONS SUR LES SYMBOLES DE SCURIT ...................................................... 11 RENSEIGNEMENTS SUR LA FORMATION SUR LA SCURIT ...................................... 11 2.2.1 Directives sur lexposition aux RF ................................................................................ 12 2.2.2 Interfrence/Compatibilit lectromagntique .............................................................. 13 INTERFRENCE DES RADIOFRQUENCES ....................................................................... 13 2.3.1 Partie 15 de la FCC ........................................................................................................ 13 2.3.2 Industrie Canada ............................................................................................................ 13 CONSEILS DUTILISATION ................................................................................................... 13 2.4.1 Utilisation Efficace de la Radio ..................................................................................... 13 INTRODUCTION ................................................................................................................................ 16 3.1 DESCRIPTION .......................................................................................................................... 16 STORAGE GUIDELINES ......................................................................................................... 16 3.2 BASIC SETUP ........................................................................................................................... 16 3.3 3.3.1 Assemble the Radio ....................................................................................................... 16 3.3.2 Removing the Battery .................................................................................................... 17 3.3.3 Removing the Optional Belt Clip .................................................................................. 17 3.4 CLEANING ................................................................................................................................ 18 3.5 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES .............................................................................................. 19 4. BASIC OPERATION ........................................................................................................................... 21 4.1 XL-200P CONTROLS ............................................................................................................... 21 4.2 TOP DISPLAY ........................................................................................................................... 23 4.3 MAIN DISPLAY ........................................................................................................................ 23 STATUS MESSAGES ............................................................................................................... 25 4.4 BEFORE FIRST USE ................................................................................................................. 25 4.5 4.6 POWER ON AND SET VOLUME ............................................................................................ 26 4.7 NOISE CANCELLATION ......................................................................................................... 26 4.7.1 Enable Noise Cancellation ............................................................................................. 26 4.7.2 Using Noise Cancellation .............................................................................................. 27 4.7.3 The Effect of Distance from the Microphone ................................................................ 27 4.7.4 Primary versus Secondary Microphone ......................................................................... 27 4.7.5 When using an SCBA Mask .......................................................................................... 28 4.8 WI-FI .......................................................................................................................................... 29 4.9 BLUETOOTH ............................................................................................................................ 29 4.10 PTT OPTIONS ........................................................................................................................... 29 4.11 VOICE ANNUNCIATION ........................................................................................................ 29 4.12 SELECT CHANNEL AND BANK ............................................................................................ 30 3 14221-1800-2000 4.12.1 Using Group/Channel Knob .......................................................................................... 30 4.12.2 Manually Enter Channel Number .................................................................................. 30 4.13 LOCK/UNLOCK KEYPAD ....................................................................................................... 30 4.14 TURN ENCRYPTION ON OR OFF .......................................................................................... 31 4.15 TRANSMIT ENABLE/DISABLE ............................................................................................. 31 4.16 USER INTERFACE PRIVILEGE LEVEL ................................................................................ 32 4.17 SELECT ZONE/SYSTEM USING MENUS ............................................................................. 32 4.18 CHANNEL GUARD (ANALOG CONVENTIONAL ONLY) ................................................. 33 4.19 USE TALKAROUND TO BYPASS REPEATER (ANALOG AND P25 CONVENTIONAL 4.21 ONLY) ........................................................................................................................................ 33 4.20 TYPE 99 OPERATION .............................................................................................................. 34 4.20.1 Enable/Disable Type 99 from Call Menu: ..................................................................... 34 4.20.2 Disable After PTT .......................................................................................................... 35 4.20.3 Auto Reset ..................................................................................................................... 35 INDIVIDUAL CALLS ............................................................................................................... 35 4.21.1 Transmit an Individual Call ........................................................................................... 35 4.21.2 Receiving an Individual Call ......................................................................................... 35 4.22 GROUP CALLS ......................................................................................................................... 36 4.22.1 Change Talkgroup ......................................................................................................... 36 4.22.2 Receive a Group Call ..................................................................................................... 36 4.23 CALL ALERT (PAGE) - P25 TRUNKED ONLY .................................................................... 36 4.23.1 Send Alert ...................................................................................................................... 36 4.23.2 Receive Alert ................................................................................................................. 37 4.24 TELEPHONE INTERCONNECT CALLS (P25 TRUNKED ONLY) ...................................... 37 4.25 DTMF ......................................................................................................................................... 37 4.26 START SCAN ............................................................................................................................ 37 4.27 STOP SCAN ............................................................................................................................... 38 4.28 MONITOR AND SQUELCH TYPES (CONVENTIONAL ONLY) ........................................ 39 4.29 NUISANCE DELETE ................................................................................................................ 39 4.30 VIEW GPS INFORMATION ..................................................................................................... 40 4.31 EMERGENCY OPERATION .................................................................................................... 41 4.31.1 Declaring an Emergency Call ........................................................................................ 41 4.31.2 Receiving an Emergency Call ....................................................................................... 41 4.31.3 Stealth Emergency ......................................................................................................... 41 4.32 ENCRYPTION BAR .................................................................................................................. 42 4.33 OTAR SCREENS ....................................................................................................................... 42 4.34 MDC-1200 (CONVENTIONAL ONLY) ................................................................................... 42 4.34.1 Normal PTT Operation .................................................................................................. 42 4.34.2 MDC PTT ID Receive Handling ................................................................................... 43 4.34.3 Emergency Declaration ................................................................................................. 43 4.35 SHORTCUT MENU .................................................................................................................. 44 5. ADVANCED OPERATIONS .............................................................................................................. 45 ENCRYPTION ........................................................................................................................... 45 5.1.1 Create Keys using Harris Key Admin ........................................................................... 45 5.1.2 Load Keys ...................................................................................................................... 45 5.1.3 Zeroize All from Radio .................................................................................................. 47 5.1.4 Protected keys ................................................................................................................ 47 5.1.5 Global Encryption .......................................................................................................... 48 5.1.6 Select Keyset ................................................................................................................. 48 5.1.7 View Key List ................................................................................................................ 48 5.1 4 14221-1800-2000 5.7 5.5 5.6 5.1.8 OTAR Configuration ..................................................................................................... 49 5.2 ACTIVATE/VIEW MISSION PLAN ........................................................................................ 49 5.3 SITUATIONAL AWARENESS (SA) P25 CONVENTIONAL ONLY ................................. 50 5.4 USER-DEFINED ZONES/SYSTEMS ....................................................................................... 51 5.4.1 Command Tactical Zone ................................................................................................ 51 5.4.2 Mixed System Zone ....................................................................................................... 51 CH INFO MENU ........................................................................................................................ 52 SETTINGS MENU ..................................................................................................................... 52 5.6.1 Audio Settings ............................................................................................................... 53 5.6.2 Display Settings ............................................................................................................. 54 5.6.3 GPS Settings .................................................................................................................. 55 5.6.4 Bluetooth ....................................................................................................................... 55 5.6.5 Clock Settings ................................................................................................................ 56 5.6.6 Battery Settings .............................................................................................................. 57 SET UP SCAN ........................................................................................................................... 57 5.7.1 Home, Priority 1, and Priority 2 Channels..................................................................... 58 5.7.2 Trunked/Conventional Scanning ................................................................................... 58 5.7.3 Vote Scan (Analog and P25 Conventional Only) .......................................................... 58 5.7.4 Edit Scan List ................................................................................................................. 59 5.7.5 Set or Remove Priority 1 and Priority 2 Channels ......................................................... 59 5.7.6 Custom Scan Lists (Conventional and P25 Conventional Only) ................................... 60 5.7.7 Wide Area System Scan (P25 Trunked Only) ............................................................... 60 5.8 MESSAGE MENU ..................................................................................................................... 61 5.8.1 Radio Status ................................................................................................................... 61 5.8.2 Radio Message ............................................................................................................... 61 5.8.3 Radio TextLink (P25 Trunked Only)............................................................................. 61 5.8.4 Faults/Alerts ................................................................................................................... 62 5.9 UTILITY MENU ........................................................................................................................ 63 5.10 PPP/SLIP .................................................................................................................................... 64 6. PROGRAMMING ................................................................................................................................ 65 PROGRAMMING VIA RPM .................................................................................................... 65 6.1 BLUETOOTH CLONING ......................................................................................................... 65 6.2 6.3 EDIT CHANNEL (CONVENTIONAL ONLY) ........................................................................ 66 6.4 OTAP (P25 TRUNKED ONLY) ................................................................................................ 67 PROGRAMMABLE BUTTONS AND SWITCHES ................................................................. 68 6.5 6.5.1 Programmable Buttons .................................................................................................. 68 6.5.2 Programmable /O Switch ............................................................................................ 69 6.5.3 Programmable A/B/C Switch ........................................................................................ 69 7. REFERENCE ........................................................................................................................................ 72 7.1 MARINE FREQUENCIES ........................................................................................................ 72 7.2 NARROWBANDING ................................................................................................................ 77 8. GLOSSARY .......................................................................................................................................... 78 9. BASIC TROUBLESHOOTING .......................................................................................................... 81 9.1 ERROR MESSAGES ................................................................................................................. 81 9.2 OTAR ERRORS/INFORMATION ............................................................................................ 82 10. TECHNICAL ASSISTANCE .............................................................................................................. 83 11. WARRANTY ........................................................................................................................................ 84 5 14221-1800-2000 LIST OF FIGURES Figure 3-1: Radio Assembly Figure 3-2: Remove the Battery Figure 3-3: Remove Belt Clip Figure 4-1: XL-200P Controls Figure 4-2: Top Display Figure 4-3: Sample Display Figure 4-4: Using the Noise Cancellation Feature Figure 4-5: Without a Speaker Microphone Attached Figure 4-6: With a Speaker Microphone Attached Figure 4-7: User Interface Privilege Page

.......................................................................................................................... 17

..................................................................................................................... 17

........................................................................................................................ 18

....................................................................................................................... 21

................................................................................................................................. 23

........................................................................................................................... 23

......................................................................................... 27

................................................................................... 27

........................................................................................ 28

............................................................................................................... 32 LIST OF TABLES Page

................................................................................. 8

......................................................... 12

............................................................................................................... 19

............................................................................ 21

............................................................................................................................................. 24

............................................................................................................................ 25

........................................................................................................... 42

............................................................................................................. 42

................................................................................................................................... 53

......................................................................................................................... 67

...................................................................................................................... 72 Table 1-1: RF Exposure Compliance Testing Distances Tableau 2-1 : Distances de test de conformit des expositions aux RF Table 3-1: Options and Accessories Table 4-1: XL-200P Controls, Indicators, and Connectors Table 4-2: Icons Table 4-3: Status Messages Table 4-4: Encryption Bar Indications Table 4-5: OTAR Display Messages Table 5-1: Alert Tones Table 6-1: Valid Frequencies Table 7-1: Marine Frequencies Harris Corporation, Public Safety and Professional Communications (PSPC) Business continually evaluates its technical publications for completeness, technical accuracy, and organization. You can assist in this process by submitting your comments and suggestions to the following:

Harris Corporation PSPC Business Technical Publications 221 Jefferson Ridge Parkway Lynchburg, VA 24501 fax your comments to: 1-434-455-6851 or e-mail us at: PSPC_TechPubs@harris.com 6 14221-1800-2000 1. REGULATORY AND SAFETY INFORMATION 1.1 SAFETY CONVENTIONS The following conventions are used throughout this manual to alert the user to general safety precautions that must be observed during all phases of operation, service, and repair of this product. Failure to comply with these precautions or with specific warning elsewhere in this manual violates safety standards of design, manufacture, and intended use of the product. Harris assumes no liability for the customers failure to comply with these standards. The WARNING symbol calls attention to a procedure, practice, or the like, which, if not correctly performed or adhered to, could result in personal injury. Do not proceed beyond a WARNING symbol until the conditions identified are fully understood or met. The CAUTION symbol calls attention to an operating procedure, practice, or the like, which, if not performed correctly or adhered to, could result in damage to the equipment or severely degrade the equipment performance. The NOTE symbol calls attention to supplemental information, which may improve system performance or clarify a process or procedure. WARNING CAUTION NOTE 1.2 SAFETY TRAINING INFORMATION The Harris XL-200P portable radio generates RF electromagnetic energy during transmit mode. This radio is designed for and classified as Occupational Use Only, meaning it must be used only during the course of employment by individuals aware of the hazards and the ways to minimize such hazards. This radio is NOT intended for use by the General Population in an uncontrolled environment. WARNING The XL-200P portable radio has been tested and complies with the FCC RF exposure limits for Occupational Use Only. In addition, this Harris radio complies with the following Standards and Guidelines with regard to RF energy and electromagnetic energy levels and evaluation of such levels for exposure to humans:

FCC OET Bulletin 65 Edition 97-01 Supplement C, Evaluating Compliance with FCC Guidelines for Human Exposure to Radio Frequency Electromagnetic Fields. American National Standards Institute (C95.1 1992), IEEE Standard for Safety Levels with Respect to Human Exposure to Radio Frequency Electromagnetic Fields, 3 kHz to 300 GHz. American National Standards Institute (C95.3 1992), IEEE Recommended Practice for the Measurement of Potentially Hazardous Electromagnetic Fields RF and Microwave. 7 14221-1800-2000 IC Standard RSS-102, Issue 4, 2010: Spectrum Management and Telecommunications Radio Standards Specification. Radiofrequency Exposure Compliance of Radiocommunication Apparatus

(All Frequency Bands). 1.2.1 RF Exposure Guidelines To ensure that exposure to RF electromagnetic energy is within the FCC allowable limits for occupational use, always adhere to the following guidelines:

CAUTION DO NOT operate the radio without a proper antenna attached, as this may damage the radio and may also cause the FCC RF exposure limits to be exceeded. A proper antenna is the antenna supplied with this radio by Harris or an antenna specifically authorized by Harris for use with this radio. (Refer to Table 3-1.) DO NOT transmit for more than 50% of total radio use time (50% duty cycle). Transmitting more than 50% of the time can cause FCC RF exposure compliance requirements to be exceeded. The radio is transmitting when the TX indicator appears in the display. The radio will transmit by pressing the PTT (Push-To-Talk) button. ALWAYS transmit using low power when possible. In addition to conserving battery charge, low power can reduce RF exposure. ALWAYS use Harris authorized accessories (antennas, batteries, belt clips, speaker/mics, etc). Use of unauthorized accessories may cause the FCC Occupational/Controlled Exposure RF compliance requirements to be exceeded. (Refer to Table 1-1.) As noted in Table 1-1, ALWAYS keep the housing of the transmitter AT LEAST 0.47 inches (1.2 cm) from the body and at least 0.98 in (2.5 cm) from the face when transmitting to ensure FCC RF exposure compliance requirements are not exceeded. However, to provide the best sound quality to the recipients of your transmission, Harris recommends you hold the microphone at least 2 in (5 cm) from mouth, and slightly off to one side. Table 1-1: RF Exposure Compliance Testing Distances TESTED DISTANCES

(worst case scenario) RADIO FREQUENCY Body1 Face 0.47 in (1.2 cm) 0.98 in (2.5 cm) VHF

(136174 MHz) UHF 0.47 in (1.2 cm)

(378522 MHz) 700/800 MHz

(768-776 MHz)

(798-806 MHz)

(806-816 MHz)

(851-861 MHz) 1 This is worst case based on the thinnest body mount accessory (belt clip). 0.47 in (1.2 cm) 8 0.98 in (2.5 cm) 0.98 in (2.5 cm) 14221-1800-2000 The information in this section provides the information needed to make the user aware of RF exposure, and what to do to assure that this radio operates within the FCC RF exposure limits. Electromagnetic Interference/Compatibility 1.2.2 During transmissions, this Harris radio generates RF energy that can possibly cause interference with other devices or systems. To avoid such interference, turn off the radio in areas where signs are posted to do so. DO NOT operate the transmitter in areas that are sensitive to electromagnetic radiation such as hospitals, aircraft, and blasting sites. 1.3 REGULATORY APPROVALS Part 15 1.3.1 This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and 2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Industry Canada 1.3.2 This device complies with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. 1.4 OPERATING TIPS Antenna location and condition are important when operating a portable radio. Operating the radio in low lying areas or terrain, under power lines or bridges, inside of a vehicle, or in a metal framed building can severely reduce the range of the unit. Mountains can also reduce the range of the unit. In areas where transmission or reception is poor, some improvement may be obtained by ensuring that the antenna is vertical. Moving a few yards in another direction or moving to a higher elevation may also improve communications. Vehicular operation can be aided with the use of an externally mounted antenna. Battery condition is another important factor in the trouble free operation of a portable radio. Always properly charge the battery. Efficient Radio Operation 1.4.1 Keep the antenna in a vertical position when receiving or transmitting a message. Do NOT hold onto the antenna when the radio is powered on!

WARNING 9 14221-1800-2000 1.4.1.1 Antenna Care and Replacement Do not use the portable radio with a damaged or missing antenna. A minor burn may result if a damaged antenna comes into contact with the skin. Replace a damaged antenna immediately. Operating a portable radio with the antenna missing could cause personal injury, damage the radio, and may violate FCC regulations. Use only the supplied or approved antenna. Unauthorized antennas, modifications, or attachments could cause damage to the radio unit and may violate FCC regulations. (Refer to Table 3-1.) WARNING CAUTION 1.4.1.2 Electronic Devices RF energy from portable radios may affect some electronic equipment. Most modern electronic equipment in cars, hospitals, homes, etc. is shielded from RF energy. However, in areas in which you are instructed to turn off two-way radio equipment, always observe the rules. If in doubt, turn it off!

CAUTION 1.4.1.3 Aircraft Always turn off a portable radio before boarding any aircraft!

Use it on the ground only with crew permission. DO NOT use while in-flight!!

WARNING 1.4.1.4 Electric Blasting Caps To prevent accidental detonation of electric blasting caps, DO NOT use two-way radios within 1000 feet of blasting operations. Always obey the "Turn Off Two-Way Radios" signs posted where electric blasting caps are being used. (OSHA Standard:

1926.900) WARNING 1.4.1.5 Potentially Explosive Atmospheres Areas with potentially explosive atmospheres are often, but not always, clearly marked. These may be fuelling areas, such as gas stations, fuel or chemical transfer or storage facilities, and areas where the air contains chemicals or particles, such as grain, dust, or metal powders. Sparks in such areas could cause an explosion or fire resulting in bodily injury or even death. Turn off two-way radios when in any area with a potentially explosive atmosphere. It is rare, but not impossible that a radio or its accessories could generate sparks. WARNING 10 14221-1800-2000 2. RENSEIGNEMENTS SUR LA RGLEMENTATION ET SCURIT 2.1 CONVENTIONS SUR LES SYMBOLES DE SCURIT Les conventions suivantes sont utilises dans le prsent manuel pour avertir lutilisateur des prcautions gnrales de scurit qui doivent tre observes pendant toutes les phases dopration, dentretien et de rparation de ce produit. Le non-respect de ces prcautions ou davertissements prciss ailleurs enfreint les normes de scurit de la conception, de la fabrication et de lutilisation prvue du produit. Harris nassume aucune responsabilit pour le non-respect de ces normes par le client. Le symbole MISE EN GARDE attire lattention sur une procdure ou une pratique qui, si elle nest pas correctement effectue ou observe, pourrait entraner une blessure personnelle. Ne pas poursuivre au-del dun symbole de MISE EN GARDE avant que les conditions identifies soient compltement comprises ou satisfaites. Le symbole AVERTISSEMENT attire lattention sur une procdure ou une pratique oprationnelle qui, si elle nest pas correctement effectue ou observe, pourrait entraner un bris dquipement ou une importante baisse de rendement de lquipement. Le symbole REMARQUE attire lattention sur des renseignements supplmentaires qui peuvent amliorer le rendement du systme ou clarifier un processus ou une procdure. MISE EN GARDE AVERTISSEMENT REMARQUE 2.2 RENSEIGNEMENTS SUR LA FORMATION SUR LA SCURIT La radio portative Harris XL-200P produit de lnergie lectromagntique des RF lorsquen mode de transmission. Cette radio est conue et classe pour une Utilisation professionnelle seulement , ce qui signifie quelle ne doit tre utilise que dans le cadre dun emploi par des individus conscients des risques et des moyens de limiter ceux-ci. Cette radio NEST PAS conue pour une utilisation par la Population gnrale dans un environnement non contrl. MISE EN GARDE La radio portative XL-200P a t teste et est conforme aux limites dexposition aux RF de la FCC pour une Utilisation professionnelle seulement . De plus, cette radio Harris est conforme aux normes et directives suivantes quant lnergie des RF et aux niveaux dnergie lectromagntique, ainsi qu lvaluation de ces niveaux pour lexposition aux humains :

Bulletin 65 du OET de la FCC, dition 97-01, supplment C, portant sur lvaluation de la conformit aux directives de la FCC quant lexposition humaine aux champs lectromagntiques des radiofrquences. American National Standards Institute (C95.1 1992), norme de lIEEE sur les niveaux scuritaires dexposition humaine aux champs lectromagntiques des radiofrquences, 3 kHz 300 GHz. American National Standards Institute (C95.3 1992), pratique recommande par lIEEE pour la mesure des champs lectromagntiques potentiellement dangereux RF et micro-ondes. 11 14221-1800-2000 2.2.1 Directives sur lexposition aux RF Pour sassurer que lexposition lnergie lectromagntique des RF se situe dans les limites acceptables de la FCC pour lutilisation professionnelle, respectez toujours les directives suivantes :

AVERTISSEMENT Nutilisez PAS la radio sans quune antenne approprie y soit connecte, car ceci peut endommager la radio et galement causer un dpassement des limites dexposition aux RF de la FCC. Une antenne approprie est celle fournie par Harris avec cette radio, ou une antenne spcifiquement autorise par Harris pour tre utilise avec cette radio. (Reportez-vous Tableau 2-1.) Ne transmettez PAS pendant plus de 50 % de la dure dutilisation totale de la radio ( cycle de service de 50 % ). La transmission pendant plus de 50 % du temps peut causer un dpassement des exigences de conformit de la FCC en matire dexposition aux RF. La radio transmet lorsque lindicateur TX apparat sur laffichage. La radio transmet lorsquon appuie sur le bouton PTT

(bouton de microphone). Transmettez TOUJOURS en basse puissance lorsque possible. En plus de prserver la charge de la pile, une faible puissance rduit lexposition aux RF. Utilisez TOUJOURS des accessoires autoriss Harris (antennes, piles, pinces de ceinture, haut-

parleurs/micros, etc.). Lutilisation daccessoires non autoriss peut entraner un dpassement des exigences de conformit pour une exposition aux RF professionnelle ou contrle de la FCC.

(Reportez-vous Table 3-1.) Tel quindiqu dans Tableau 2-1, conservez TOUJOURS lappareil et son antenne AU MOINS 1,2 cm du corps, et au moins 2,5 cm du visage pendant la transmission, pour vous assurer de ne pas dpasser les exigences de conformit de la FCC en matire dexposition aux RF. Cependant, pour offrir la meilleure qualit sonore aux auditeurs de votre transmission, Harris recommande de tenir le microphone au moins 5 cm (2 po) de votre bouche et lgrement dplac sur un ct. Tableau 2-1 : Distances de test de conformit des expositions aux RF RADIOFRQUENCES VHF

(136174 MHz) UHF

(378522 MHz) 700/800 MHz

(768-776 MHz)

(798-806 MHz)

(806-816 MHz)

(851-861 MHz) Corps2 1,2 cm 1,2 cm 1,2 cm DISTANCES TESTES

(pire des scnarios) Visage 2,5 cm 2,5 cm 2,5 cm 2 Ce est le pire des cas base sur le corps plus mince monter accessoire (clip ceinture). 12 14221-1800-2000 Dans cette section figurent les renseignements ncessaires pour sensibiliser lutilisateur lexposition aux RF et sur ce quil faut faire pour sassurer que cette radio fonctionne dans les limites dexposition aux RF de la FCC. Interfrence/Compatibilit lectromagntique 2.2.2 Pendant les transmissions, cette radio Harris produit de lnergie des RF qui peut causer de linterfrence avec dautres appareils ou systmes. Pour viter de telles interfrences, fermez la radio dans les zones o il est indiqu de le faire. Nutilisez PAS le transmetteur dans des zones sensibles aux radiations lectromagntiques, comme les hpitaux, les avions et les sites de dtonation. 2.3 Partie 15 de la FCC INTERFRENCE DES RADIOFRQUENCES 2.3.1 Cet appareil est conforme la Partie 15 de la rglementation de la FCC. Le fonctionnement est soumis aux deux conditions suivantes :

1. Cet appareil ne doit pas causer une interfrence nuisible; et 2. Cet appareil doit accepter toute interfrence reue, y compris une interfrence qui peut causer un fonctionnement non souhait. Industrie Canada 2.3.2 Le prsent appareil est conforme aux CNR d'Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorise aux deux conditions suivantes : (1) l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et (2) l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radiolectrique subi, mme si le brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre le fonctionnement. 2.4 CONSEILS DUTILISATION Lemplacement et ltat de lantenne sont importants pour lutilisation dune radio portative. Lutilisation de la radio dans des zones de faible lvation, sous des lignes lectriques ou des ponts, lintrieur dun vhicule ou dans un immeuble ossature mtallique, peut rduire la porte de lappareil de manire considrable. Les montagnes peuvent galement rduire la porte de lunit. Dans les zones o la transmission ou la rception est insatisfaisante, certaines amliorations peuvent tre obtenues en sassurant que lantenne est verticale. Se dplacer de quelques mtres dans une autre direction ou un emplacement plus lev peut galement amliorer les communications. Lutilisation dune antenne fixe lextrieur peut faciliter le fonctionnement dans un vhicule. Ltat de la pile est un autre facteur important dune utilisation sans tracas dune radio portative. Chargez toujours correctement la pile. Utilisation Efficace de la Radio 2.4.1 Gardez lantenne dans une position verticale pendant la rception ou la transmission dun message. Ne tenez PAS lantenne lorsque la radio est allume!

MISE EN GARDE 13 14221-1800-2000 2.4.1.1 Entretien Et Remplacement De Lantenne Nutilisez pas la radio portative si son antenne est endommage ou absente. Une brlure lgre peut se produire au contact dune antenne endommage avec la peau. Remplacez immdiatement une antenne endommage. Lutilisation dune radio portative alors que lantenne est absente peut causer des blessures, endommager la radio et pourrait enfreindre la rglementation de la FCC. Utilisez seulement lantenne fournie ou une antenne approuve. Des antennes non autorises, des modifications ou des ajouts une antenne peuvent endommager la radio et enfreindre la rglementation de la FCC. (Reportez-vous Table 3-1.) MISE EN GARDE AVERTISSEMENT 2.4.1.2 Appareils lectroniques Lnergie des RF provenant de radios portatives peut affecter certains appareils lectroniques. La majorit de lquipement lectronique moderne dans les voitures, les hpitaux, les maisons, etc. est blind contre lnergie des RF. Cependant, dans les zones o lon vous demande de fermer lquipement de radio bidirectionnelle, respectez toujours les rgles. En cas de doute, teignez-le!

AVERTISSEMENT 2.4.1.3 Avion teignez toujours une radio portative avant dembarquer bord dun avion!

Ne lutilisez au sol quavec la permission de lquipage. NE lutilisez PAS durant le vol!

MISE EN GARDE 2.4.1.4 Dtonateurs lectriques Pour prvenir la dtonation accidentelle des dtonateurs lectriques, nutilisez PAS de radios bidirectionnelles moins de 305 m (1 000 pi) des oprations de dtonation. Respectez toujours les indications teindre les radios bidirectionnelles situes l o des dtonateurs lectriques sont utiliss. (Norme OSHA : 1926.900) MISE EN GARDE 14 14221-1800-2000 2.4.1.5 Atmosphre Potentiellement Explosive Les zones ayant une atmosphre potentiellement explosive sont souvent, mais pas toujours, identifies clairement comme telles. Il peut sagir de zones dalimentation en carburant, comme les postes dessence, les installations de stockage ou de transfert de carburant ou de produits chimiques, ainsi que les zones dont lair contient des produits chimiques ou des particules, comme des grains, de la poussire ou des poudres mtalliques. Des tincelles dans de telles zones peuvent provoquer une explosion ou un incendie, causant ainsi des blessures ou mme la mort. teignez les radios bidirectionnelles dans toute zone ayant une atmosphre potentiellement explosive. Il est rare, mais pas impossible quune radio ou ses accessoires produisent des tincelles. MISE EN GARDE 15 14221-1800-2000 3. 3.1 DESCRIPTION INTRODUCTION The XL-200P provides users with advanced capabilities, interoperability, and ease of use in an extremely rugged radio that performs under the most adverse conditions. By supporting multiple operating modes

(P25 Trunked, P25 Conventional, and Analog Conventional) across the VHF, UHF, and 700/800 MHz bands in a single radio, responders can communicate and collaborate with multiple jurisdictions and agencies operating on multiple frequencies and systems. The XL-200P is available with both a Full and Limited keypad and in black and high-visibility yellow. XL-200P features include:

Active Noise Cancellation using three microphones to transmit intelligible audio from users in loud environments AMBE+2 Vocoder providing noise cancellation capability and optimizing audio quality for loud and clear communications Meets MIL-STD-810G for durability and certified for more stringent tests of 1.5-meter drop to concrete Easy-to-read multi-color front display and monochromatic top display to enhance communications for improved user safety Instant Recall allowing users to replay the last transmission received Built-in GPS for position tracking and rapid response for emergencies Wi-Fi and Bluetooth functionality For optional accessories, refer to Table 3-1. Additional accessories may have been added since publication of this manual; contact Harris for more information. 3.2 STORAGE GUIDELINES Store your XL-200P and batteries in a clean, cool (not exceeding 86 F [+30 C]), dry, and ventilated storage area. 3.3 BASIC SETUP 3.3.1 Assemble the Radio Only use a Harris charger approved for the battery chemistry. Injury could occur from improper charger use. WARNING CAUTION Do not over-tighten the antenna as damage could result. 1. Make sure batteries are charged per charger manual 10515-0372-4010 (supplied with the charger). 16 14221-1800-2000 2. To attach optional belt clip, remove the existing tab from the back of the radio above the battery compartment. Slide the belt clip into the groove. 3. Lift clip, if installed, and slide top of battery into top of battery compartment at the rear of the radio. 4. Press down on bottom side of battery until it snaps into place. 5. Radio may need to be set for battery type (refer to Section 5.6.6). Figure 3-1: Radio Assembly Removing the Battery 3.3.2 To remove, press and hold tab, lift battery clip, then pull battery up and out of the radio. Figure 3-2: Remove the Battery Removing the Optional Belt Clip 3.3.3 Remove the battery before removing the belt clip. To remove the belt clip, press and hold the tab towards the top of the battery compartment and slide the belt clip out of the groove in the back of the radio. 17 14221-1800-2000 Figure 3-3: Remove Belt Clip 3.4 CLEANING Keep the exterior of the radio, battery, antenna, and radio accessories clean. Periodically clean using the following procedures:

1. To remove dust and dirt, clean using damp clean cloth (warm water and mild detergent soap). 2. Follow by wiping with damp (warm water) clean cloth. Wipe dry with clean cloth. 3. Remove the battery and wipe the battery and radio contacts using a soft dry cloth to remove dirt or grease. This will ensure efficient power transfer from the battery to the radio. 4. Remove any accessories and clean the accessories Universal Device Connector (UDC) contacts using a clean dry cloth. When the UDC is not in use, cover the connector with the protective dust cap to prevent the build-up of dust or water particles. 5. If the radio is used in a harsh environment (such as driving rain, salt fog, etc.), it may be necessary to periodically dry and clean the battery and radio contacts with a soft dry cloth or soft-bristle non-

metallic brush. For more rigorous cleaning, use the following procedure:

Do not use chemical cleaners, spray, or petroleum-based products. They may damage the radio housing. We recommend using Chemtronics Electro-Wash PR (ES-1603) or equivalent. CAUTION 1. Apply the cleaning solution to a clean damp cloth and clean the radio. Do not spray cleaning solution directly on radio. To clean the radio in the speaker and microphone areas, carefully wipe these areas but prevent the cleaning solution from entering the speaker or microphone openings. NOTE 2. Wipe off the radio with clean damp cloth using mild warm soapy water. 3. Follow up by wiping off the radio with clean damp cloth using warm water only. 4. Wipe dry with clean cloth. 18 14221-1800-2000 3.5 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES Only use Harris approved accessories. Refer to Harris Product and Services catalog for the complete list of options and accessories available. Contact Harris for requirements not contained in this list:

Always use the correct options and accessories (battery, antenna, speaker/mic, etc.) for the radio. Immersion rated options must be used with an immersion rated radio. Refer to Table 3-1. CAUTION Table 3-1: Options and Accessories DESCRIPTION ANTENNAS Antenna, 146-162 MHz, Helical Antenna, 806-870MHZ, Flex End-Fed Gain Antenna, 764-870MHz, 1/4 Wave Whip Antenna, Full Spectrum BATTERIES/CHARGERS Battery, Lithium, Standard Capacity Battery, Lithium, Standard Capacity, Cold Temp Battery, Lithium, Extended Capacity Charger, Single Bay Charger, Multi Bay Charger, Vehicular AUDIO ACCESSORIES Speaker Microphone Speaker Microphone, Emergency Button Speaker Microphone, Wireless, Bluetooth Speaker Microphone, Premium, Fire, Noise Cancelling, Hirose Microphone, Palm, 2-Wire, Black Microphone, Palm, 2-Wire, Beige Microphone, Mini-Lapel, 3-Wire, Black Microphone, Mini-Lapel, 3-Wire, Beige Bluetooth, Covert, Earpiece/MIC/PTT, Radios MISCELLANEOUS ACCESSORIES Cable, Data Interface Cable, MATQ-03424, Test Cable, USB, Key Loading/Programming Cable, KVL, Key Loading Adapter, 6-Pin Hirose Holster, Leather, Radio, Premium Holster, Nylon, Black, Radio, Premium PART NUMBER KRE1011219/2 KRE1011506/1 KRE1011506/2 14035-4000-01 14035-4010-01 14035-4040-01 14035-4030-01 14035-1800-01 14035-1800-02 14035-4100-01 12082-0600-01 12082-0600-02 12082-0681-01 12150-4001-02 12082-0650-01 12082-0650-02 12082-0650-03 12082-0650-04 12082-0684-01 12082-0445-A1 12082-0435-A1 12082-0410-A1 12082-0400-A1 14002-0197-01 14035-4200-01 14035-4200-03 19 14221-1800-2000 DESCRIPTION Holster, Ring, Leather, Radio, Premium Holster, Leather, Radio, Standard Holster, Nylon, Black, Radio, Standard Holster, Ring, Leather, Radio, Standard Belt Loop, Leather, Premium D-Swivel Strap, Shoulder Belt Loop, Leather PART NUMBER 14035-4200-04 14035-4202-01 14035-4202-03 14035-4202-04 14002-0218-01 12082-3230-01 CC103333V1 KRY1011609/1 20 14221-1800-2000 4. BASIC OPERATION 4.1 XL-200P CONTROLS Figure 4-1: XL-200P Controls Table 4-1: XL-200P Controls, Indicators, and Connectors FUNCTION Used to select channels/groups. Turn clockwise to power on radio and increase volume of audio heard in speaker. Minimum volume levels may be programmed into the radio to prevent missed calls due to a low volume setting. Can be programmed for multiple functions (see Section 6.5.2 for details). When noise cancellation is enabled, the rear and front microphones are used together to form a dual microphone system. Noise cancellation improves the quality of transmitted voice. When noise cancellation is disabled, only the front microphone is used. See Section 4.7 for detailed information on using noise cancellation. By default, selects one of four channel banks (see Section 4.8). Can be programmed for multiple functions. See Section 6.5.3 for details. CONTROL/INDICATOR Group/Channel Knob Power/Volume Knob A/B Switch Microphone (Rear) A/B/C/D Switch 21 14221-1800-2000 CONTROL/INDICATOR User-Programmable Buttons Push-To-Talk (PTT) Button Battery Antenna Connector Emergency Button Indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) Top Display Speaker Microphones (Front) Front Display Soft-Key Displays Soft Keys Select Button Navigation Buttons Keypad

(Full Keypad Models) FUNCTION Used to select a commonly used function as an alternative to navigating menus. This is configured via programming using RPM. Press to transmit. Make sure Push-To-Talk (PTT) is enabled (Section 5.6.1). Battery - Refer to Section 3.3 for battery connection and removal. Provides Subminiature version A (SMA) antenna connector. Used to place radio in emergency mode (see Section 4.31). This button can be disabled via programming using RPM. In addition, this button can be used in conjunction with a User Programmable Button to Clear Emergencies if configured to do so. Indicates radio status. Red = actively transmitting. Green = actively receiving. Orange = actively transmitting encrypted. Top display shows summary of status such as channel, battery, scanning, and emergency status. Display orientation can be configured for viewing from the front or rear of the radio

(Section 5.6.2). Radio speaker which can be muted (Section 5.6.1). Adjust volume using the Power/Volume knob. When noise cancellation is enabled, the rear and front microphones are used together to form a dual microphone system. Noise cancellation improves the quality of transmitted voice. When noise cancellation is disabled, only the front microphones are used. See Section 4.7 for detailed information on using noise cancellation. Front display shows complete status and radio menus. Displays the current function associated with the corresponding soft key located directly below each option on the keypad. Dynamic keys that have their current function labeled on the radio display directly above each button. to display Channel Information or select a highlighted menu item. Press Press while on the idle display to access the Main Menu. Press while on the idle display to access the Shortcut Menu (see Section 4.35). Press while on the idle display to display functions for hard keys. Press and to navigate menus. Used to enter text or numbers, and to quickly access menus. The * key also acts as a home key to quickly navigate back to the main screen. 22 4.2 TOP DISPLAY 14221-1800-2000 The top display shows a summary of status, such as channel number, channel short name, system short name, battery, scanning, and emergency mode. The display can be configured for viewing from the front or rear of the radio (see Section 5.6.2). Channel short name and zone/system short name are programmed in RPM. Figure 4-2: Top Display 4.3 MAIN DISPLAY The idle display appears after power up or after exiting from the menus. The XL-200P also contains an icon glossary in the Utility Menu (see Section 5.9). Figure 4-3: Sample Display 23 14221-1800-2000 ICON DESCRIPTION ICON DESCRIPTION ICON DESCRIPTION Table 4-2: Icons Trunked Signal Strength TX Power Receive Signal Strength Channel Idle Transmitting Encrypted TX Disabled Tones Disabled PTT Disabled Battery Level 100% Capacity Battery Level 75% Capacity Battery Level 50% Capacity Battery Level 25% Capacity Battery Level 5% Capacity

(Low Battery Audio Indicator) Battery Level Battery Exhausted

(RX-Only State) Battery Charging**

Battery Fully Charged**

Speaker Muted Bluetooth On Bluetooth Connected Secure Traffic Global Encryption OTAR Disabled OTAR Registered OTAR Registering OTAR Rekeying Talkaround Enabled Transmit Power Level RX Only Monitor On VDOC Failsoft Receiving Data Transmitting Data Virtual Site Alert(s) Present Vote Scanning Scanning Enabled Emergency RX Mail GPS Tracking Noise Cancellation Enabled Unit Unselected Unit Selected Unselected Unit in Emergency Selected Unit in Emergency Nuisance Channel Conventional Site Unregistered Conventional Site Registered Type 99 Enabled

** Smart Battery Only 24 14221-1800-2000 4.4 STATUS MESSAGES During radio operation, various radio Status Messages may be displayed. The messages are described below. MESSAGE PTT DENIED CALL QUEUED SYSTEM BUSY SCANNING TX EMERGENCY RX EMERGENCY WIDE AREA SCAN INVALID TALKGROUP INVALID UNIT REGISTERING CTRL CHANNEL SCAN BAND SCANNING PROFILE SUCCESSFUL OTAR REKEYING OTAR REKEY COMPLETE Table 4-3: Status Messages DESCRIPTION P25 Trunked only - Indicates the radio or talkgroup is not authorized to operate on the selected system and/or talkgroup. P25 Trunked only - Indicates the system has placed the call in a request queue. P25 Trunked only - Indicates the system is busy, no channels are currently available, the queue is full, or an individual call is being attempted to a radio that is currently transmitting. Indicates the radio is scanning. P25 modes only - Indicates an emergency call is being transmitted. P25 modes only - Indicates an emergency call is being received. If programmed via RPM, radio will display the unit name or unit ID. P25 Trunked only - Indicates the radio has entered the Wide Area Scan mode to search for a new system (if enabled through programming). P25 Trunked only - Indicates the current talkgroup is not valid for the current system. This could happen if the site denies registration due to an unrecognized talkgroup ID. P25 Trunked only - Indicates the current unit is not valid for the current system. P25 Trunked only - Displayed when the radio is performing a registration/affiliation on a P25 trunking site. P25 Trunked only - Indicates the control channel is lost and the radio has entered the Control Channel Scan mode to search for the control channel (usually out of range indication). P25 Trunked only - This message is only displayed if the P25T system is configured for

"EnhancedCC" mode of operation. When the radio cannot find a Control Channel in either the trunked frequency set or the list of discovered adjacencies, the radio is able to perform a full spectrum frequency scan to find a new Control Channel. P25 Trunked only - A new mission plan was written to the radio by ProFile Manager and activated. OTAR Rekey operation is in progress. OTAR Rekey operation completed successfully. 4.5 BEFORE FIRST USE Make sure XL-200P has:

Fully charged battery Antenna attached Mission plan and radio programmed using the RPM Encryption keys loaded if using encrypted channels Mission plan activated 25 14221-1800-2000 4.6 POWER ON AND SET VOLUME The power switch and volume control are the same knob on top of the radio (see Figure 4-1). Turn the Power/Volume Knob clockwise to power on XL-200P and increase the volume. Minimum volume levels may be programmed into the radio to prevent missed calls due to a low volume setting. The radio can be programmed to require the entry of a PIN in order to operate the radio. Check with your System Administrator if you forget your PIN. As the PIN is entered, an asterisk is displayed for each digit. The actual value is not displayed. NOTE NOTE 4.7 NOISE CANCELLATION The XL-200P features Harris proprietary noise suppression capability to provide clear and crisp voice quality in high-noise environments. This can be used in any mode, including analog and digital communications. The XL-200P has two microphones; one located on the front (primary) and one on the rear (secondary). The primary microphone operates in exactly the same manner as a normal radio and is the one you talk into. The secondary microphone is used to pick up the surrounding noise when noise cancellation is turned on. In the case where noise cancellation is enabled and a speaker microphone is attached to the XL-200P, talk into the speaker microphone. In this mode, XL-200P front microphone is used to pick up the surrounding noise, and the rear microphone is unused. See Section 4.7.4 for more information. If the secondary microphone is blocked, the XL-200P operates as though noise cancellation is turned off. Enable Noise Cancellation 4.7.1 To enable Noise Cancellation:

1. Press to access the main menu. 2. Select SETTINGS AUDIO SETTINGS. 3. Highlight and enable NOISE CANCELLATION using Refer to Section 5.6.1 for more information on the Audio Settings menu. 26 14221-1800-2000 Using Noise Cancellation 4.7.2 When using the noise cancellation feature, observe the following:

Verify NOISE CANCELLATION is enabled (see Section 4.7.1). Ensure the primary and secondary microphones are not covered. See Section 4.7.4 for more information on the primary and secondary microphones. Talk within two (2) inches of primary microphone (see Figure 4-4). Speak clearly, loudly, and with authority. If possible, face the noise source when talking into the radio (see Figure 4-4). In very noisy environments, it is o.k. to yell into the radio. The radio can handle very loud input levels. Figure 4-4: Using the Noise Cancellation Feature The Effect of Distance from the Microphone 4.7.3 Unlike a normal microphone system, noise cancellation makes the level of your voice diminish quickly as you move away from the radio. In essence, the radio starts to see your voice as surrounding noise. Whereas, you may be comfortable speaking up to a foot away under normal operation, noise cancellation requires that you hold the radio close. 4.7.4 Primary versus Secondary Microphone 4.7.4.1 Without a Speaker Microphone Attached The primary microphone is located on the front of the radio and the secondary is on the back of the radio. See Figure 4-5 for the location of these microphones. INSERT GRAPHIC Figure 4-5: Without a Speaker Microphone Attached 4.7.4.2 With a Speaker Microphone Attached When a speaker microphone is attached, the radio electronically switches over to use the radios front microphone as secondary. The microphone on the attached speaker microphone becomes primary (see Figure 4-6). 27 14221-1800-2000 INSERT GRAPHIC Figure 4-6: With a Speaker Microphone Attached When using an SCBA Mask 4.7.5 When using the SCBA mask, the primary microphone can be held directly against the voice port. If the SCBA has a voice amplifier, the same rule applies. Ensure that the secondary microphone is uncovered. If possible, point the secondary microphone toward the noise source. 28 14221-1800-2000 4.8 WI-FI 4.9 BLUETOOTH 4.10 PTT OPTIONS The radio can be programmed via RPM with one of the following PTT options:

Radio and Accessory In this mode, when the radio is PTTd the audio source will correspond with the PTT source. If the source of PTT is radio, the audio is routed via the radio microphone. If the source of PTT is an external microphone accessory, the audio is routed via the external microphone accessory. Accessory Only - Any PTT input will have the audio routed through the external microphone accessory. The Bluetooth Speaker Mic is unaffected by this setting. PTTing the Bluetooth Speaker Mic always results in audio being routed via the Bluetooth Speaker Mic. NOTE 4.11 VOICE ANNUNCIATION When enabled via programming, the Voice Annunciation feature provides audible feedback for various radio operations. The radio can be programmed to play an audio message for any or all of the following. This message can be a pre-recorded (canned) message or a user-recorded message. Zone changes Channel changes System changes Encryption On/Off Noise Cancellation On/Off Scan On/Off Talkaround On/Off For more information on configuring the radio for Voice Annunciation, refer to the Voice Annunciation Feature manual 14221-7200-6110. 29 14221-1800-2000 4.12 SELECT CHANNEL AND BANK Using Group/Channel Knob 4.12.1 The XL-200P can be programmed with 1000 channels per system, with 16 channels in each of the three banks. Bank A: Channel A1 - A16 Bank B: Channel B1 - B16 Bank C: Channel C1 - C16 Bank D: Channel D1 - D16 Use the Group/Channel knob to select group/channel 1 16. Use the A/B/C/D switch to set bank. The selected bank is indicated on the display. If your system has more than 64 channels, the SEL CHAN/GRP option available from the shortcut menu, allows you to select a channel group with channels 97-144, etc. See Section 4.35 for more information. NOTE 4.12.2 Manually Enter Channel Number To manually enter a channel using the radio keypad:

1. Select CHANNEL ENTRY from the Shortcut Menu (this menu option must be programmed to the shortcut menu using RPM R10B or later). 2. Enter the channel number. You can enter raw numeric index or bank letter and channel number (e.g., while the cursor is on B18 and 66 will both select channel 66). To enter the bank letter, press the first digit to cycle through 2/A/B/C. Entering a number greater than the maximum number of entries in the selected zone will select the last channel. From the radios perspective, channels entered in this manner are not treated any differently from channels selected by the channel knob; for example, the scan list will be adjusted to add the channel

(and make it P1 if applicable), emergencies will go out on the entered channel, etc. Physically moving the channel knob or changing the system causes the radio to select the channel indicated by the channel knob position (in other words, subsequent channel changes are not made with respect to the manually entered channel). NOTE 4.13 LOCK/UNLOCK KEYPAD The A/B switch can be programmed to lock/unlock the keypad. Or Lock the keypad via the shortcut menu (see Section 4.35). Use the navigation buttons to unlock the keypad. Make sure the exact sequence of , , , and is used. Power cycling the radio will not unlock the keypad unless the RPM setting for Power Up Options is enabled. See Table 4-1 for the various options that can be programmed to the A/B switch. NOTE 30 14221-1800-2000 4.14 TURN ENCRYPTION ON OR OFF The A/B switch can be programmed to enable/disable encryption. See Table 4-1 for the various options that can be programmed to the A/B switch. NOTE Or Turn encryption on or off via the Security Menu:

1. Press to access the main menu. 2. Use to highlight and select SECURITY. 3. Use to highlight and enable/disable encryption. This option is grayed out if the A/B switch is programmed for encryption, or if Encryption Mode in the radios personality is programmed Forced On. If a channel is programmed to be encrypted, a key icon appears on the main display when encryption is enabled. The system must also be programmed to be encrypted. When encryption is turned on and you use any channel not configured for encryption, the radio allows PTT. The signal is transmitted unencrypted. Systems configured for Global Encryption (enabled in the Security menu) will display a Global Encryption icon instead of a key icon (Section 5.1.4). 4.15 TRANSMIT ENABLE/DISABLE When transmit is disabled, all forms of transmission from the radio are disabled, including Bluetooth. This is designed for use in explosive atmospheres. If enabled via programming, use the A/B switch to enable or disable transmit. See Table 4-1 for the various options that can be programmed to the A/B switch. NOTE 31 14221-1800-2000 4.16 USER INTERFACE PRIVILEGE LEVEL Depending on radio programming, some of the menu options described in this manual may not be available. The following table details the menus available for the different levels of User Interface Privilege:

Figure 4-7: User Interface Privilege FULL ACCESS LIMITED ACCESS RESTRICTED ACCESS Audio Settings GPS Settings Clock Settings Battery Setting Bluetooth Settings View Scan List Edit Scan List Zeroize Keyset Changeover Global Encryption Global Key Program Menu only in Active Mission Plan Self-test on Utility Menu TCXO Tuning on Utility Menu P25 Test Selection on Utility Menu Command Tactical Zone 4.17 SELECT ZONE/SYSTEM USING MENUS A zone/system is a group of channels that can be programmed by agency or geographical region. For example, a system could be for fire, police, New York, Los Angeles, etc. 1. Press to access the main menu. 2. Use to highlight and select ZONE. A mission plan can have up to 512 systems, independent of banks or channels. 3. Use 4. Use to view zone/system. to highlight and select zone/system. indicates the active zone/system. If VIEW ZONE is selected, a screen appears allowing you to view the channels in the zone/system. 5. Use 6. Use New zone/system appears. to scroll through the zones/systems. to select highlighted zone/system. 32 14221-1800-2000 4.18 CHANNEL GUARD (ANALOG CONVENTIONAL ONLY) Channel Guard is Harriss trademark for CTCSS (tone squelch) and CDCSS (digital tone squelch). The Channel Guard menu is only accessible if the System is setup for CG SEL in the radios personality. NOTE To select the Channel Guard tone:

1. Press to access the main menu. 2. Use to highlight and select CALL. 3. Use to highlight and select CHANNEL GUARD. 4. Use to highlight and select RECEIVE GUARD or TRANSMIT GUARD. 5. Use to highlight and select the desired option from the list. 6. The Channel Guard frequency is displayed on the main display. The Channel Info screen and Channel Edit screen will change depending on this selection. See Sections 5.5 and 6.2 for more information. 4.19 USE TALKAROUND TO BYPASS REPEATER (ANALOG AND P25 CONVENTIONAL ONLY) You can bypass the repeater system to communicate directly with other radios on your current channels receive frequency. This is useful if you are out of range of a repeater or if a repeater is busy. You will need to be in range of the other radio. 1. Press to access the main menu. 2. Use to highlight and select CALL. 3. Use to change TALKAROUND MODE to ENABLED. 4. The Talkaround icon appears. Calls are now made on the receive frequency until you disable talkaround mode via the CALL menu. Power cycling the radio does not disable talkaround. Or If programmed for Talkaround enable/disable, use

:

Enables Talkaround. O Disables Talkaround. 33 14221-1800-2000 NOTE See Table 4-1 for the various options that can be programmed to the switch. If the Talk-Around Indication feature is enabled in RPM, the radio will play a unique grant tone when a call is placed on a simplex channel or when Talk-Around has been enabled on a duplex channel. This feature applies to both Analog and P25 Conventional systems. It optionally allows the radio to also play the same tone when it receives a call while operating in simplex or Talk-Around. If configured, the radio plays the tone at the selected volume level. The tone will not play on systems configured with MDC. NOTE Talk-Around Indication can be specified for each individual Analog and P25 Conventional system configured in personality. The following options can be selected, and apply only when the radio is on a simplex channel or when Talk-Around has been enabled by the user:

Disabled: (This is the default option.) When this option is selected, the radio plays the standard grant tone when a call is placed. The radio does not play a tone when a call is received. Transmit Only: When this option is selected, the radio plays a different Talk-Around grant tone when a call is placed. The radio does not play a tone when a call is received. Transmit & Receive: When this option is selected, the radio plays a different Talk-Around grant tone when a call is placed, and at the beginning of a received call. In the radio personality, the Alert Tone parameter needs to be enabled for each channel on the Conventional Frequency Set. The Ready To Talk Tone parameter must also be enabled for the Talk Around Indication tone to be played when the radio is keyed. NOTE 4.20 TYPE 99 OPERATION Type 99 is Harris' name for in-band, two-tone sequential signaling. It is a conventional signaling protocol used to control the muting and unmuting of a radio. This signaling is commonly used for selective calling of individual units or groups of units in a conventional system. In Type 99 tone systems, calls are not heard until the radio detects the proper two-tone sequence. This, in conjunction with squelch, prevents the user from hearing noise or undesired conversations. When the radio detects the second tone, it sounds the appropriate Type 99 alert tone. After the second tone stops, the receiver audio path is opened in order for the user to receive messages. Enable/Disable Type 99 from Call Menu:

4.20.1 1. Press to access the main menu. 2. Use to highlight and select CALL. 3. Press to change T99 TOGGLE between ENABLED and DISABLED. T99 is displayed in the top of the radio display when Type 99 is enabled. 34 14221-1800-2000 Disable After PTT 4.20.2 If this option is programmed in RPM, Type 99 is disabled after the radio user activates the PTT. This allows the radio user to monitor traffic on the channel (after a PTT action) without pressing the monitor button. Can be used in conjunction with the Auto Reset option to disable Type 99 after a PTT and automatically reset, or enable, Type 99 after 30 seconds. Auto Reset 4.20.3 If this option is programmed in RPM, Type 99 is automatically reset, or turned back on, after 30 seconds. Can be used in conjunction with the Disable After PTT option to disable Type 99 after a PTT and automatically reset, or enable, Type 99 after 30 seconds. 4.21 INDIVIDUAL CALLS An individual call is used to make a call to one radio as opposed to a group of radios. An individual call can only be made on a digital channel. Refer to Section 4.35 to initiate an individual call from the shortcut menu. NOTE Transmit an Individual Call 4.21.1 1. Press to access the main menu. 2. Use 3. Use 4. Use to highlight and select CALL. to highlight and select INDIVIDUAL CALL. to highlight and select the unit to call or select KEYPAD ENTRY to enter the Unit ID. 5. Press PTT to make the call. 6. To end call, use The amount of time the radio remains in Individual Call mode with no activity is programmable via RPM. to select END CALL. Receiving an Individual Call 4.21.2 1. When receiving an Individual Call, the radio displays the calling radios name or Unit ID. If the radio is programmed for Acknowledged Individual Call, the radio displays ICALL REQUESTED, then displays the Unit ID. 2. Press the PTT button to respond. The amount of time the radio will remain in the Individual Call mode with no activity is programmable via RPM. 3. The radio rings and indicates a missed call if you do not respond to an incoming Individual Call. The ring sounds continuously until you press PTT, select the CLR MISSED softkey, change channel/group/system, or power cycle the radio. 4. Select END CALL to end the individual call in progress. 35 14221-1800-2000 5. If your system is configured for Acknowledged Individual Call, you have the option to REJECT CALL using

. 4.22 GROUP CALLS Change Talkgroup 4.22.1 A talkgroup is a group of radios that you want to have private conversations with. These groups can be divided into areas such as state, region, county, or large special events. A group call can only be made on digital channels. P25 Trunked Turn the Channel/Group knob to select the desired group (see P25 Conventional 1. Press to access the main menu. Figure 4-1). 2. Use 3. Use to highlight and select CALL. to highlight and select CHANGE TLKGRP. 4. Use to highlight and select the talkgroup. After selecting the new talkgroup, the radio returns to the main screen. 5. Press PTT to make the call. Receive a Group Call 4.22.2 When receiving a group call, the radio display toggles between the Unit Name and the Group Name of the transmitting radio. Note that if either of those names is not programmed, the corresponding ID number is displayed. 4.23 CALL ALERT (PAGE) - P25 TRUNKED ONLY Send Alert 4.23.1 1. Press to access the main menu. 2. Use 3. Use to highlight and select CALL. to highlight and select CALL ALERT. 4. Use to highlight and select the desired unit from the list or select KEYPAD ENTRY to enter the Unit ID. 5. Press PTT to send the page. 36 14221-1800-2000 Receive Alert 4.23.2 1. When receiving a Call Alert, the radio displays the calling radios name or Unit ID. 2. The radio rings and indicates a missed call. The ring sounds continuously until you press PTT, select the CLR MISSED softkey, change group/system, or power cycle the radio. 4.24 TELEPHONE INTERCONNECT CALLS (P25 TRUNKED ONLY) 1. Press to access the main menu. 2. Use 3. Use to highlight and select CALL. to highlight and select PHONE CALL. 4. Select SYSTEM LISTING to select from a list of pre-programmed numbers for the active system, select USER LISTING to select from a list of user-defined numbers for all systems, or select DIRECT DIAL to enter the number directly. Direct Dial entry can have up to 31 characters (0-9, *,

#, or a space; the space correlates to a pause.) 5. Press PTT to initiate the phone call. 6. Use to select END CALL. 4.25 DTMF The XL-200P supports the transmission of DTMF tones corresponding to the numbers/characters on the keypad. To overdial numbers/characters, press and hold the PTT button, and then press the corresponding keys one at a time on the keypad. Valid keys for DTMF tones are: (1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, *, 0, and #). DTMF tones will only play if the current system is programmed for DTMF (part of general System configuration). NOTE 4.26 START SCAN This procedure assumes that the scan list has been added and the radio is not in active scan. Refer to Section 5.7 for scan setup or Section 4.27 for stopping scan. Refer to Section 5.7.1.1, Section 5.7.1.2, and Section 5.7.1.3 for home and priority channel descriptions. Refer to Section 4.35 to start scan from the shortcut menu. NOTE 1. Press to access the main menu. 2. Use to highlight and select SCAN. 37 14221-1800-2000 3. Use to highlight and select START SCAN. The green START SCAN text changes to red STOP SCAN. to select BACK and exit scan menu. 4. Use Or The A/B switch can be programmed to start/stop scan. If the A/B switch is programmed for start/stop scan, the other methods of starting and stopping scan are disabled. See Table 4-1 for the various options that can be programmed to the switch. NOTE NOTE 4.27 STOP SCAN Stop scan from the shortcut menu (see Section 4.35). Or 1. Press to access the main menu. 2. Use to highlight and select SCAN. to highlight and select STOP SCAN. to select BACK and exit scan menu. 3. Use 4. Use Or The A/B switch can be programmed to start/stop scan. If the A/B switch is programmed for start/stop scan, the other methods of starting and stopping scan are disabled. See Table 4-1 for the various options that can be programmed to the A/B switch. NOTE NOTE 38 14221-1800-2000 4.28 MONITOR AND SQUELCH TYPES (CONVENTIONAL ONLY) The monitor function allows you to temporarily turn off selected squelch to monitor for traffic that may not normally break squelch. The type of squelch used depends on an analog or digital channel. Start or stop Monitor via the shortcut menu (Section 4.35). For analog channels, there is:

Noise squelch - any received signal breaks squelch. Continuous Tone Coded Squelch (CTCSS) - squelch is selective based on tone code. Continuous Digital Coded Squelch (CDCSS) - squelch is selective based on digital code. For digital channels, there is:

Monitor squelch - any received digital signal breaks squelch. Normal squelch - Received Network Access Code (NAC) must be correct to break squelch. Selective squelch - Received NAC and talkgroup Identification (ID) or unit ID must be correct to break squelch. During encrypted operations, the radio only unmutes when receiving with the same key. NOTE 4.29 NUISANCE DELETE A channel can temporarily be deleted from the scan list. The selected channel, priority 1, and priority 2 channels cannot be nuisance deleted. You can also perform a nuisance delete from the shortcut menu

(Section 4.35). Nuisance delete can only be performed on the active scan list. NOTE 1. Press to access the main menu. 2. Use to highlight and select SCAN. 3. Use to highlight and select SCAN LISTS. 4. Use the navigation buttons to highlight the scan list. 5. Use to select VIEW/EDIT. 6. Use the navigation buttons to highlight the channel. 7. Use to select OPTIONS. 8. Use to highlight and select NUISANCE. indicates the active scan list. 39 14221-1800-2000 The icon appears next to the channel and it will not be scanned. 9. Use to highlight and select ADD BACK to add channel back to scan list. If you do not add the channel back to the list, the channel will return to the scan list when you cycle radio power or activate a mission plan. 10. Use 11. Use to select BACK and exit the channel list. to select BACK and exit the scan list display. 4.30 VIEW GPS INFORMATION You can use the internal Global Positioning System (GPS) receiver to view your position and satellite information. Remember, GPS requires an unobstructed view of the sky and the signal is greatly diminished inside buildings, tunnels, heavily forested areas, etc. GPS may not work at all under some conditions, especially in metal enclosures or buildings. 1. Press to access the main menu. 2. Use buttons to highlight and select GPS. You can observe GPS status:

GPS DISABLED - GPS is disabled via programming. GPS TRACKING - GPS has acquired satellite signal. GPS time appears on top of display. GPS SEARCHING - GPS has not acquired. Harris logo appears on top of display if GPS has not tracked after last power up of the radio. LAST KNOWN POS - Radio was tracking and then lost GPS signal. The information displayed is from the last known position. 3. Use 4. Use to select NEXT to view satellite information. to select BACK and exit GPS screens. 40 14221-1800-2000 4.31 EMERGENCY OPERATION The XL-200P can be programmed to enable emergency mode. Unit name displays on dispatcher console if an emergency signal is received from another XL-200P on a digital channel. Declaring an Emergency Call 4.31.1 1. Press and hold the emergency button on the radio or the speaker microphone. The length of time you need to hold the button is configured in RPM. Radio software R4A and later is needed to declare an emergency from the 12082-

0681-01 Bluetooth speaker microphone. NOTE For digital channels, the radio transmits the talkgroup or radio ID to the dispatch console and receiving radio. The radio can be programmed to have a dedicated emergency channel, which can get activated from analog or digital channels. The radio can also be programmed to send an Emergency Alarm in addition to or in place of the emergency call (P25 modes). The radio will go through transmit and receive cycles if configured. Speak into the microphone while the radio is transmitting or press PTT to talk. 2. To exit emergency, power cycle the radio or select EXIT EMERGENCY from the CALL menu. If enabled via programming, you can clear an emergency by pressing the Monitor/Clear button (top side button by default) and then the emergency button. Receiving an Emergency Call 4.31.2 When receiving an Emergency Call, an alert beep sounds (if tones are enabled) and an emergency indication is displayed. Depending on options selected in RPM, the unit ID or unit name may be displayed. While the emergency display is active, press PTT to respond to the emergency caller. Stealth Emergency 4.31.3 The radio can be programmed with the following emergency behavior:

No audio indications when declaring an emergency. No visual indications when declaring an emergency. Or Or No audio and no visual indications when declaring an emergency. During stealth mode, the radio will not receive any type of call. Once the user presses the PTT button, the radio display and audio returns to normal. 41 14221-1800-2000 4.32 ENCRYPTION BAR The encryption bar is shown in Table 4-4. Encryption keys must be loaded (Section 5.1.2) for these indications to be displayed. Table 4-4: Encryption Bar Indications DISPLAY DESCRIPTION This is an example of a key name of an AES and a DES key being transmitted or received. Encryption key assigned to channel was not found. This message appears on receive radios. Encryption key assigned to channel was not used on transmitting radio. 4.33 OTAR SCREENS The OTAR screen is shown in Table 4-5. OTAR must be enabled (see Section 5.1.8). Table 4-5: OTAR Display Messages DISPLAY DESCRIPTION is This

(receiving/transmitting, registering, and rekeying). the main screen showing the OTAR status 4.34 MDC-1200 (CONVENTIONAL ONLY) MDC-1200 is a legacy in-band signaling protocol that provides the radio with the ability to transmit and receive a unique PTT ID. This PTT ID can be decoded by receiving radios and displayed as a hexadecimal number or an alias string. In addition, MDC-1200 provides radios with the ability to transmit emergency status to a console. Refer to the MDC-1200 Feature Manual, 14221-7200-6000, for complete instructions on configuring and using this feature. Normal PTT Operation 4.34.1 If MDC signaling on PTT press is enabled in RPM, the radio transmits an MDC PTT ID message when PTT is pressed. If the Sidetone option is enabled in RPM, the radio plays a Ready-to-Talk (RTT) tone after the MDC pre-signaling has been transmitted. If MDC signaling on PTT release is enabled (in RPM), the radio transmits post-call MDC signaling when PTT is released. IF STE is enabled (in RPM), the MDC post-call signaling is transmitted after STE is sent on PTT release only. MDC post-call signaling is also sent when there is a radio unkey due to Carrier Control Timeout

(CCT). Normal CCT alert tones occur prior to unkey. 42 14221-1800-2000 MDC PTT ID Receive Handling 4.34.2 When the radio receives an MDC PTT ID, it searches the MDC ID Alias List for an alias associated with the ID. If one is found, it displays the alias. If none is found, the radio displays the ID in hexadecimal. Emergency Declaration 4.34.3 Emergency declaration is accomplished by the radio generating an MDC Emergency PTT message. An Emergency is considered acknowledged when the radio receives an Ack To Emergency PTT message with an ID which matches its own ID. If Emergency Audio is enabled and the PTT Sidetone option is enabled, the radio plays the Ready-to-Talk tone after the MDC Emergency PTT signaling is transmitted. If an MDC Alert on ACK is enabled, the radio plays an ACK tone when the MDC emergency is acknowledged. If audio tones are enabled, the radio plays an ACK tone if the emergency is not acknowledged within the programmed number of retries. 43 14221-1800-2000 4.35 SHORTCUT MENU The shortcut menu options vary depending on radio programming. Up to 16 options can be programmed. 1. At main display, press to display the shortcut menu. 2. Select an option using the keypad or use to scroll through and select the desired option. Available options vary depending on radio programming and may include:

START/STOP SCAN - Start or stop scan shortcut menu. START SCAN appears if not scanning. STOP SCAN appears if scanning. START SCAN is grayed out if the radio has declared an emergency (TX EMERGENCY). START/STOP MONITOR - (P25 Conventional and Analog Conventional) Monitor and squelch types. This is grayed out if radio is scanning. See Section 4.28 for information on monitor and squelch types. NUISANCE DEL Nuisance delete. This is grayed out if not scanning or if the radio has declared an emergency (TX EMERGENCY). Priority 1 and priority 2 channels cannot be nuisance deleted. NOTE LOCK KEYPAD Lock the keypad. TX PWR LOW/HIGH Toggle transmit power low or high. DISPLAY SA Displays the Situational Awareness screen. START ICALL Allows you to select a unit for an Individual Call. CHANNEL GUARD Allows you to select an Operator Selectable tone. OTAR REKEY Initiate an Over-the-Air Rekey. TALKARND ON/OFF Enable/Disable Talkaround mode. SEL CHAN/GRP Select the channel/group bank. If your system has more than 48 channels, this allows you to select a channel group with channels 49-96, 97-144, etc. (A17- A32, B17 B32, C17 C32, A33 A48, etc., is displayed by the radio). 1-16: Channels 1-48 17-32: Channels 49-96 33-48: Channels 97-144 49-64: Channels 145-192, etc. This option is grayed out when the Command Tactical Zone is active. See Section 5.4.1 for more information. NOTE VOICEANNC ON/OFF Turns Voice Annunciation on/off. See Section 4.11 for more information. 44 14221-1800-2000 5. ADVANCED OPERATIONS 5.1 ENCRYPTION Create Keys using Harris Key Admin 5.1.1 Refer to the following documentation for advanced programming and setup instructions:

Harris OTAR Overview Manual - MM-008069-001 Network Key Manager Installation and Configuration Manual - MM-008070-001 Harris UAS Key Management Application Manual - MM-008068-001 Harris Key Manager Key Admin Overview and Operation Manual - MM1000019423 Harris Key Manager Key Loader Overview and Operation Manual - MM1000019424 Motorola KVL 3000 Plus Key Variable Loader (KVL) User's Guide Motorola KVL 4000 Key Variable Loader (KVL) User's Guide If using Key Manager to create and load keys, ensure that you have version R5A or later installed. Versions prior to R5A do not support the XL-200P portable radio. NOTE Harris Key Admin is part of the Harris Key Manager and is for use by the Crypto Officer (CO). The CO creates a Master Set of keys from which a Distribution Set is produced. Using the Key Admin software, the CO can save keys into Distribution key files for technicians to use in radios. 1. Select Start Programs Harris Key Manager Harris Key Admin. 2. Select New Master Set, Open, or Import from Security Device. Refer to the Key Admin online help for more information on creating keys. 3. When finished, create a Distribution Key File. A Distribution Key File is used with the Key Loader to load key sets into the radio and cannot be edited. Refer to the Key Admin online help for more information on creating the Distribution Key File. 5.1.2 Load Keys 5.1.2.1 Load UKEKs with Key Loader and RPM (for OTAR-Enabled Systems) UKEKs are loaded into Harris OTAR radios using the Key Loader application. Key Loader is a part of Key Manager. To load encryption keys:

1. Obtain the UKEK file and Storage Location Number (SLN) Binding Report information from the Crypto Officer (CO). Both AES and DES UKEKs can be contained within the same UKEK file. NOTE 2. If not already on, power-up the PC that has RPM and the Key Loader applications installed on it, and start Windows. 45 14221-1800-2000 3. Connect the radio to the PC using programming cable 12082-0410-A1. The Unity drivers must be installed before UKEKs can be loaded into the radio. If not already installed, the Unity drivers can be found on the Key Loader CD (unity setup.exe) or on the Key Admin CD (unity setup.exe). NOTE 4. Load the UKEK file from the Crypto Officer onto the PC. 5. Run the RPM application and setup the radios personality according to the SLN Binding Report information. 6. Setup the talk groups and the SLN mappings (Talk Group ID to SLN). This includes mapping SLNs to the System keys (PSTN, All Call, etc.). 7. Select Options P25 OTAR Options and set the following:

a. The OTAR Message Number Period (MNP) as defined by the System Administrator. b. The radios Individual RSI (from the SLN Bindings Report). c. The KMFs RSI (from the SLN Bindings Report). 8. Select Radio Program or click on the Program icon and write the personality to the radio. 9. Run the Key Loader application. 10. Open the UKEK file loaded in step 4. 11. Select the Target Device type (Auto-Detect is preferred) and click the Load button. 12. When prompted, enter your user name and password and click OK. The Key Loader reads the target devices identifying information, retrieves a UKEK of the proper algorithm type from the UKEK file, and downloads the UKEK to the target device at the proper SLN and keyset with the proper key ID. 13. Click the Finish button to exit the Key Loader application. New UKEKs are loaded and the radio is now ready to accept TEKs via OTAR with the trunked radio network. 5.1.2.2 Load Keys using Harris Key Loader Harris Key Loader is part of Harris Key Manager and can be used by the Crypto Officer or Technician to load the keys into the portable radio. Refer to the Harris Key Loader online help if additional information is required when performing this procedure:

1. Connect the radio to the PC using the 12082-0410-A1 programming cable. 2. Power on the radio, if not already. 3. Select Start Programs Harris Key Manager Harris Key Loader. 4. At the Key Loader Welcome screen, click Next. 5. Select Load a Distribution Set into one or more devices. 6. Click Next. 7. Browse to the Key File and enter the password. 8. Click Next to validate the password and continue. If the password is incorrect, the screen will display an error message. 46 14221-1800-2000 9. Select USB from the drop-down and click Next. 10. Select the radio from the drop-down and click Load. 11. Click Finish. 5.1.2.3 Load Keys using Motorola KVL Device Type 3 Digital Encryption Standard Output Feedback (DES-OFB) and Advanced Encryption Standard, 256-bit (AES-256), encryption methods are supported. The Type 3 Encryption keys are loaded via a Motorola KVL device using Telecommunications Industry Association (TIA)/Project 25 (P25) key fill device protocol. Make sure that valid keys have been created and stored in the KVL device before proceeding. 1. Power on KVL Device. 2. Connect KVL Device to side connector using a 12082-0400-A1 cable. Once the Device is connected, a keyset is established whether the keys are loaded or not. You will need to zeroize to bring the XL-200P to a fully zeroized state (Section 5.1.3). 3. The key fill in progress screen will be displayed and the radio can accept keys from the KVL Device. 4. Remove the KVL Device cable from the radio. Zeroize All from Radio 5.1.3 It may be necessary to remove keys because of compromise or expiration. 1. Press to access the main menu. 2. Use to highlight and select SECURITY. 3. Use to highlight and select ZEROIZE KEYS. Use to highlight and select YES if you want to remove the keys. This will also remove the keysets. 5. Use to select OK. Protected keys 5.1.4 The Protected Keys feature transfers P25 Voice Keys, from Harris Key Loader to the radio, that have been wrapped (AES) or encrypted (DES) with Key Protection Keys (KPKs). KPKs are nothing more than unprotected Key Encryption Keys (KEKs). The KPKs need to be loaded into the radio before the 47 14221-1800-2000 Protected Keys are loaded. Once loaded into the radio, the KPKs will be used to unwrap (AES) or decrypt

(DES) the Protected Keys. Refer to Section 5.1.2.2 for key loading instructions. Global Encryption 5.1.5 Global Encryption can be enabled when encryption keys are loaded on the radio and the selected Zone/System is encrypted. When Global Encryption is enabled on the radio, Global Key is used for all encrypted transmissions until:

Global Encryption is disabled. A new mission fill is activated. The active keyset is changed. The system is changed. Global Encryption behavior is available on all channels that support encrypted communications. 1. Press to access the main menu. 2. Use to highlight and select SECURITY. 3. Use to change GLOBAL ENCRYPTION to ENABLED. 4. Use to highlight and select the key. 5. To change the selected global key, use to highlight and select GLOBAL KEY. 6. Use to highlight and select the global key. RPM allows Key Numbers to be given Key Names. 7. The global key icon is displayed on the main display. Select Keyset 5.1.6 1. Press to access the main menu. 2. Use to highlight and select SECURITY. 3. Use 4. Select Home Key or repeatedly press to exit menus. to highlight and select ACTIVE KEYSET to toggle to the inactive keyset. View Key List 5.1.7 1. Press to access the main menu. 2. Use to highlight and select SECURITY. 3. Use to highlight and select KEY LIST. 48 14221-1800-2000 4. The available key lists are displayed. Select the Home Key or repeatedly press to exit menus. OTAR Configuration 5.1.8 OTAR is the over-the-air-rekeying from a KMF and must be enabled for the digital only channel using RPM. For OTAR operation, the appropriate KEKs must be loaded into the radio using the Harris Key Loader or a KVL device. The KMF Configuration must include the RSI of the KMF and the appropriate Message Number Period. 1. Press to access the main menu. 2. Use 3. Use 4. Use to highlight and select SECURITY. to change OTAR to ENABLED or DISABLED. to select OTAR REKEY to request that the KMF updates the keys in the radio. OTAR REKEY is only enabled if the radio has successfully registered for data operations. NOTE 5. Select Home Key or repeatedly use to exit menus. 5.2 ACTIVATE/VIEW MISSION PLAN Mission plans contain radio programming information such as frequencies, channels, stations, and talk groups. Up to 10 different mission plans can be stored in the radio, but only one can be activated at a time. 1. Press to access the main menu. 2. Use to highlight and select PROGRAM. 3. Use 4. Use 5. Use to highlight and select mission plan. indicates the active mission plan. to select OPTIONS. to highlight and select:

ACTIVATE PLAN - to activate the highlighted plan. If the plan has a power-up PIN, you are prompted to enter the PIN before activation continues. VIEW PLAN INFO - to view mission plan information. If plan is activated, radio displays series of screens indicating status, ending with a PLAN COMPLETE followed by name of plan. to select OK. 6. Use You cannot activate a plan when the radio is transmitting an emergency. A MISSION PLAN FAILED message may be displayed for errors such as invalid syntax in the fill or 49 14221-1800-2000 some other invalid parameter. 7. If a plan is being viewed, radio displays the plans filename. Plan information appears if field was filled out in RPM. 8. Use 9. Select Home Key or repeatedly use to select BACK. to exit menus. 5.3 SITUATIONAL AWARENESS (SA) P25 CONVENTIONAL ONLY Situational Awareness is a feature in which the XL-200P receives SA position from other units configured to send the SA packets. The SA display shows the positions of the other radios (units) relative to the XL-200P. To make use of SA, all radios need to have a uniquely programmed Unit ID. SA information can also be sent to an external application via a PPP or SLIP connection using port 18088. 1. Press to access the main menu. 2. Use to highlight and select GPS. 3. Use to select NEXT. 4. Use to select NEXT again. 5. Press left and right to view location of each unit. If the selected unit is red, it is in emergency;

otherwise, the selected unit is displayed in green. 6. GPS status is as follows:

Green Tracking Orange Last known position Red Searching 7. Press up and down to zoom the display distance of current unit. 8. Select OPTIONS. From here, select UNIT INFO to display details about the selected unit, select REFRESH to update information, or select EXIT. 50 14221-1800-2000 5.4 USER-DEFINED ZONES/SYSTEMS Command Tactical Zone 5.4.1 The Command Tactical Zone is defined on-the-fly at the radio. A Command Tactical Zone is reset when a Mission Plan is activated. NOTE To create a Command Tactical Zone:

1. Press to access the main menu. 2. Use to highlight and select ZONE. 3. Use to highlight <USER-DEFINED> and select OPTIONS. 4. Select VIEW/EDIT or select RENAME ZONE to rename the Command Tactical Zone (up to 16 characters are allowed). 5. From the View/Edit menu, press left or right using to scroll through existing systems. Press up to highlight desired channel/group. Select ADD CH/GRP or DEL CH/GRP or or down using press the select button when the channel/group is highlighted. 6. After adding all desired channels/groups, activate the Command Tactical Zone by selecting OPTIONS SET ACTIVE or pressing the select button when the Command Tactical Zone is highlighted on the Zone menu. 7. After a creating a Command Tactical Zone, select EDIT ZONE to edit what is in the Command Tactical Zone, view details about the channel/group, and delete any channel/group. 8. Select DETAILS to view the system, channel or talkgroup name, and the knob position. 9. Select OPTIONS CLEAR ZONE from the Zone menu to clear all channels/groups from the Command Tactical Zone. Mixed System Zone 5.4.2 Mixed System Zones are defined in RPM and cannot be edited on the radio. If a Mixed System Zone is not configured in RPM, it will not appear on the radio. Up to 50 Mixed System Zones can be defined. You can view details about each channel/group. A user programmable button can be defined to scroll through just the mixed system zones. 1. Press to access the main menu. 2. Use to highlight and select ZONE. 3. Use to highlight the Mixed Zone and select VIEW ZONE. 51 14221-1800-2000 4. Use to highlight the desired group/channel in the list and select DETAILS. 5. The system, channel or talkgroup name, and the knob position are displayed. 5.5 CH INFO MENU The CH INFO softkey is only available if a Channel Edit Password has been programmed via RPM. NOTE The Channel Information (CH INFO) menu displays information about the currently selected channel. The information displayed varies between conventional and trunked systems. 1. Press to access the main menu. 2. Use to scroll through the programmed channel settings. 3. Additional settings can be found by scrolling down. Channel Guard selections (see Section 4.18) are indicated by asterisks. to select EDIT CHAN. CONVENTIONAL ONLY:

4. Use 5. Enter password. Password remains active until power cycle. Refer to Section 6.2. 5.6 SETTINGS MENU The settings menu allows you to change global radio settings such as audio, display, GPS, Bluetooth, clock, and battery settings. 1. Press to access the main menu. 2. Use to highlight and select SETTINGS. to highlight setting. 3. Use 4. Additional settings can be found by scrolling down. Refer to the Sections 5.6.1 through 5.6.6 for more information on the available settings. Available menu items vary depending on radio programming. 52 14221-1800-2000 Audio Settings 5.6.1 Set audio settings such as speaker mute, noise cancellation, PTT, and tones. 1. Enter the Settings Menu. 2. Use to highlight and select AUDIO SETTINGS. 3. Use to select and change settings as desired:

SPEAKER - Mute or Unmute the speaker audio. NOISE CANCELLATION - Enable or disable noise cancellation. Noise cancellation reduces background noise during transmit. PTT - Enable or disable Push-To-Talk (PTT). Disable to prevent accidental keying, such as when radio is in holster or you are getting into a car. TONES - Enable or disable alert tones (see Table 5-1). KEYPAD TONES - Enable or disable keypad tones. When enabled, the radio plays a tone when a button on the keypad is pressed. 4. Use to exit menu. Table 5-1: Alert Tones TONE DESCRIPTION SOUND/DURATION Ready To Talk Tone Unencrypted (Analog FM or P25 digital) After a PTT is pressed, this is an audible indication (tone) for you to begin speaking into the microphone. 1000 Hz for 25 ms Ready to Talk Tone Encrypted P25 digital After a PTT is pressed, this is an audible indication (tone) for you to begin speaking into the microphone. 1200 Hz tone for 25 ms PTT Denied PTT not possible. Momentary tone is present:

Receive only Key not found PTT button disabled Emergency button disabled Emergency not supported for current channel Clear transmit denied 544 Hz tone for 75 ms Maximum transmit duration expires Maximum transmit duration is exceeded. 5 beeps and then a 544 Hz tone for 75 ms Low Battery Alarm Alarm sounds upon initial detection of low battery and every 30 seconds thereafter. Tone stops upon detection of a battery charging state. Emergency Call Received Radio is receiving an emergency call or priority call. Out of Range Radio fails to find a local control channel. 937 Hz tone for 50 ms Sequence of tones:

Silence for 60 ms 1300 Hz tone for 50 ms 600 Hz tone for 250 ms and 1800 Hz tone for 250 ms Programmable via RPM:

Disabled (no tone) Slow (tone every 15s) 53 14221-1800-2000 TONE DESCRIPTION SOUND/DURATION Medium (tone every 10s) Fast (tone every 5s) Display Settings 5.6.2 1. Enter Settings Menu. 2. Use to highlight and select DISPLAY SETTINGS. 3. Use to change settings as desired:

FRONT BACKLIGHT - Turn front display backlight on, off, or momentary. FRONT BRIGHTNESS - Set brightness level of front display. A level of 0 has same effect as turning off backlight. FRONT TIMEOUT - Specify how long the radio needs to be inactive before the front displays backlight turns off. TOP BACKLIGHT - Specify how long the top displays backlight will remain lit:

MOMENTARY, ON, or OFF. TOP BRIGHTNESS - Set the brightness level of the top display. A level of 0 turns off top display and indicator (TX/RX) LED. TOP TIMEOUT - Specify how long the radio needs to be inactive before the top displays backlight turns off. TOP ORIENTATION - Set orientation of top display to be viewed from radio: FRONT, BACK, or AUTO. When AUTO is selected, the XL-200P changes top display to be viewed from back if an external microphone or speaker is attached. Otherwise, the display can be viewed from the front. 4. Use to exit the menu. 54 5.6.3 GPS Settings 14221-1800-2000 GPS SETTINGS only appears if enabled in RPM and the feature is installed. NOTE 1. Enter Settings Menu. 2. Use to highlight and select GPS SETTINGS. 3. Use to change settings as desired:

GPS - Enable or disable internal GPS. LINEAR UNITS - Set unit of measurement of displayed linear units: STATUTE, METRIC, or NAUTICAL. ANGULAR UNITS - Set unit of measurement of displayed angular units: CARDINAL, DEGREES, or MILS. POSITION FORMAT- Set format of displayed position information: Latitude/Longitude Degrees Minutes Seconds (LAT/LONG DMS), LAT/LONG DM, Military Grid Reference System (MGRS), or Universal Transverse Mercator (UTM). 4. Use to exit the menu. 5.6.4 Bluetooth BLUETOOTH SETTINGS only appears if enabled in RPM and the feature is installed. NOTE 1. Enter Settings Menu. 2. Use to highlight and select BLUETOOTH. 3. Use to set ENABLED to YES. 4. Use to select PAIRING MGMT. This is used to pair the radio with another Bluetooth device. 5. Make sure device being paired is powered on and has discovery mode enabled in order to pair with the XL-200P. If no devices are found and Bluetooth is enabled, ADD NEW appears in the lower right corner. If devices are found, OPTIONS appears. to ADD NEW or OPTIONS. 6. Use 55 14221-1800-2000 If OPTIONS was selected, the options menu appears. 7. Use to highlight and select ADD NEW. Device being paired should be displayed. 8. Use 9. Use to REFRESH device list if device does not appear. to highlight and select device. Progress is then displayed. For Bluetooth 2.0 devices, a pin code screen appears. 10. Enter pin code. 11. Use to select OK. For Bluetooth 2.1 devices, an accept/deny screen appears. 12. Use NOTE: You will also need to accept the passkey on the Bluetooth 2.1 device as well. to select ACCEPT. to select OK. A message appears when pairing is complete. 13. Use Paired device is then displayed under pair devices list. 14. Use NOTE: Names containing extended ASCII characters may not display correctly. to select OPTIONS. 15. Use to highlight and select choices. If INFO was selected, the paired device information screen appears. 16. Use to exit menu. 17. Use to highlight and select FRIENDLY NAME. This is the Bluetooth name assigned to the radio. The friendly name configured in RPM will overwrite this setting. 18. Enter name for device. to select OK. 19. Use to exit menu. 20. Use Clock Settings 5.6.5 1. Enter Settings Menu. 2. Use to highlight and select CLOCK SETTINGS. 56 14221-1800-2000 3. Use to change settings as desired:

DISPLAY TIME - Set 12 or 24 hour time display format. TIME ZONE - Set time zone relative to Universal Time Coordinated (UTC). 4. Use to exit menu. Battery Settings 5.6.6 1. Enter Settings Menu (see Section 5.6). 2. Use to highlight and select BATTERY SETTINGS. Use only Harris approved batteries. Injury could occur from using incorrect battery. WARNING 3. Use to select the appropriate battery:

LITHIUM ION - For accurate battery indication on front and top displays, if battery attached to rear of radio is a Lithium-ION (Li-ION) type. NIMH - For accurate indication on front and top displays, if battery attached to rear of radio is a Nickel Metal Hydride (Ni-MH) type. ALKALINE - For accurate battery indication on front and top displays, if battery attached to rear of radio is clamshell containing disposable AA alkaline batteries. PRIMARY LITHIUM - For accurate battery indication on front and top displays, if battery attached to rear of radio is clamshell containing disposable AA lithium batteries. If smart battery is detected, SMART is displayed and you will not be able to change the setting. Smart battery shows information such as voltage level, percent charge, chemistry, and charging state. 4. Use to exit menu. 5.7 SET UP SCAN These procedures are used to set up the scan list, home channels, and priority channels. Refer to Section 4.23. 1. Press to access the main menu. 2. Use to highlight and select SCAN, or press

. 3. Use to highlight and select SCAN LISTS and refer to the following sections. NOTE When using Preemptive Priority Scan, the frequencies in the list need to be unique. 57 14221-1800-2000 5.7.1 Home, Priority 1, and Priority 2 Channels 5.7.1.1 Home Channel This is the channel you transmit on by default when you press PTT while the radio is actively scanning and is not responding to a just received call. Responding to a call the radio just received while scanning is called hang time. If hang time is set to 0 in RPM, the radio always transmits on the home channel in scan. 5.7.1.2 Priority 1 Channel This channel will be scanned more often than other channels in the list and will be scanned in between every other channel in the scan list. An example scan sequence would be P1 (priority 1), C2, P1, C3, P1, C4, etc. Also, the priority channel will be scanned even while actively receiving on a non-priority channel. For example, if the radio is actively receiving on C3 and activity is detected on P1, the radio will drop C3 and switch to P1. 5.7.1.3 Priority 2 Channel This channel will also be scanned more often than others. An example scan sequence would be P1, C2, P1, C3, P1, C4, P2, C5, P1, C6, P1, C7, P1, C8, P2, C9 etc. Also, this channel will be scanned even while actively receiving on a non-priority channel. For example, if the radio is actively receiving on C3 and activity is detected on P2, the radio will drop C3 and switch to P2. Additionally, activity on P1 can also preempt P2, but P2 cannot preempt P1. Trunked/Conventional Scanning 5.7.2 Trunked/conventional scanning adds the ability to scan multiple conventional and P25 conventional channels while still maintaining P25 trunked radio operation. In essence, the radio is able to scan a conventional scan list while still receiving a P25 trunked control channel and receiving P25 trunked calls. Selection of which conventional scan list is associated with a given trunked system is done in RPM and cannot be changed on the radio. However, a user with sufficient UI privilege level (see Section 4.16) is allowed to edit the scan list members (both trunked groups and conventional channels on the selected Conventional Priority System). As the number of conventional channels being scanned increases, the time between scanning each channel increases (roughly 250 milliseconds per channel), with the consequent increase in the number of calls that will late-enter. In order to avoid missing calls, it is recommended to keep the number of conventional channels being scanned to eight (8) or fewer. The trunking site must have roaming set to Enhanced CC. NOTE Vote Scan (Analog and P25 Conventional Only) 5.7.3 If vote scan is enabled via RPM, the radio automatically selects the strongest signal ensuring that the best audio quality is delivered to the user. If vote scan is enabled, the radio is always scanning. You cannot stop scanning, start normal scanning, or monitor the channel. There is an icon in the upper status bar indicating that the radio is vote scanning. If Talkaround is enabled, Vote Scan is turned off. NOTE 58 14221-1800-2000 Edit Scan List 5.7.4 Depending on the scan list options selected in RPM, you may be able to add or remove channels/groups from the scan list. 1. Enter Set up Scan (see Section 5.7). 2. Use to highlight and select the scan list. Use to select VIEW/EDIT. 3. Use 4. Use to highlight channel/group. to select OPTIONS. 5. Use to select ADD CHAN/DELETE CHAN, SET PRI1, SET PRI2, REMOVE PRI, or NUISANCE/ADD BACK. is channel a not grayed When list, appears. When a channel/group is grayed out (not in list), ADD CHAN appears. 6. Use 7. Use 8. Use to toggle selection. to exit list. to exit scan list. out the in DELETE CHAN Set or Remove Priority 1 and Priority 2 Channels 5.7.5 Priority channels are scanned more often than non-priority channels. Note that P1 and P2 can only be set if configured as Keypad and the scan list is not set to Fixed in RPM. 1. Enter Set up Scan (see Section 5.7). 2. Use 3. Use 4. Use 5. Use to highlight scan list. to select VIEW/EDIT. to highlight channel/group. to select OPTIONS. 6. Use to highlight and select SET PRI1 or SET PRI2. Priority 1 channel appears with a P1 and Priority 2 channel appears with a P2. Select REMOVE PRI to remove priority. 7. Use 8. Use to exit channel/group list. to exit scan list. 59 14221-1800-2000 Custom Scan Lists (Conventional and P25 Conventional Only) 5.7.6 Custom scan list can be created in RPM or on the fly at the radio. To allow the creation of custom scan lists on the radio, the RPM setting Disable Custom Scan for Backward Compatibility needs to be unchecked in Custom Scan Options. To create a custom scan list at the radio:

1. Press to access the main menu. 2. Use to highlight and select SCAN. 3. Use to highlight and select SCAN LISTS. 4. Use 5. Use to scroll to the CUSTOM LISTS tab and select ADD SCAN LIST. to highlight the newly created scan list and select OPTIONS VIEW/EDIT. 6. Use to scroll through the available system tabs. From OPTIONS, you can add/delete channels and set P1 and P2 channels. Empty scan lists with no channels are deleted, after confirmation from the user, once the user returns to the top-level scan menu. 7. Enable the custom scan list from the scan menu, using ENABLED. to change CUSTOM SCAN to When a custom scan list is selected, that list is scanned any time scanning is enabled for any conventional or P25 Conventional system. To scan only the channels assigned to a particular system, custom scanning must be turned off. NOTE Wide Area System Scan (P25 Trunked Only) 5.7.7 Wide Area System Scan (WASCAN) causes the radio to roam across mobile systems when the currently selected system's control channel is lost. The radio will scan the control channels of other systems. 1. Press to access the main menu. 2. Use 3. Use 4. Use to highlight and select SCAN, or press

. to highlight and enable SITE ROAMING. to select BACK and exit the scan menu. 60 14221-1800-2000 5.8 MESSAGE MENU Radio Status 5.8.1 The status feature is used to send a particular status condition to the site without making a voice call. There can be up to 10 status conditions programmed into the radio. For each status defined, there is an ID and an alphanumeric name. The ID is sent to the site and the alphanumeric name appears on the radio display when the ID corresponds with the information programmed at the site. 1. Press to access the main menu. 2. Use 3. Use to highlight and select MESSAGE. to highlight and select RADIO STATUS. 4. Use to highlight and select desired message. The icon changes to an arrow to indicate active status after the status has been sent and is acknowledged by the site. Radio Message 5.8.2 The message feature is used to send a particular message to the site without making a voice call. There can be up to 10 messages programmed into the radio. For each message defined, there is an ID and an alphanumeric name. The ID is sent to the site and the alphanumeric name appears on the radio display when the ID corresponds with the information programmed at the site. 1. Press to access the main menu. 2. Use to highlight and select MESSAGE. 3. Use to highlight and select RADIO MESSAGE. 4. Use to highlight and select the desired message. The icon changes to an arrow to indicate active status after the message has been sent and is acknowledged by the site. Radio TextLink (P25 Trunked Only) 5.8.3 Radio TextLink provides short text messaging functionality for radios. Because of the difficulty of entering text messages on a radio, predefined "canned" messages and predefined replies can be stored in the radio. To facilitate sending messages where information must be provided at send time, text message forms will also be stored in the radio. A form contains up to four (4) text prompts, for which the operator enters alphanumeric values before sending the message. 5.8.3.1 Radio TextLink Messages 1. Press to access the main menu. 2. Use to highlight and select MESSAGE. 3. Use to highlight and select TEXTLINK MSGS. 61 14221-1800-2000 4. Use to highlight the desired message. 5. Use to select OPTIONS. From here, you can change callee, send the selected message, or view details for the selected message. 5.8.3.2 Radio TextLink Forms Form messages are displayed and stored in the radio as a message in which each field to be filled is indicated by a question mark (?) followed by one or more asterisks(*). The number of asterisks indicates the maximum number of alphanumeric characters allowed for that field. 1. Press to access the main menu. 2. Use to highlight and select MESSAGE. 3. Use to highlight and select TEXTLINK FORMS. 4. Use to highlight and select the desired message. 5. Enter text into blank field(s) (up to 8 alpha-numeric characters). 6. Select OPTIONS. From here, you can change callee, send the selected message or view details of the selected message. 5.8.3.3 View Received Messages When the 1. Press to access the main menu. icon appears on main display, there are Radio TextLink messages waiting to be read. 2. Use to highlight and select MESSAGE. 3. Select TEXTLINK MAILBOX. From the mailbox, select OPTIONS to delete messages, view details of messages, and reply to messages. Faults/Alerts 5.8.4 1. Press to access the main menu. 2. Use to highlight and select MESSAGE. 3. Use to highlight and select FAULTS/ALERTS. 4. Observe messages in display. The alert icon goes away when you go to the message display (unless a new fault occurs). 62 14221-1800-2000 5. Use 6. Use 7. If you view but do not delete the fault, the alert icon goes away. to select OPTIONS. to highlight and select DETAILS, DELETE, or DELETE ALL. For DETAILS:

BATTERY FAULT BATTERY COMMS FAULT - replace battery. NON-STANDARD BATTERY - replace battery. EEPROM FAULT - contact Harris. RF FAULT OVERCURRENT - Check antenna and antenna connection. Try replacing antenna. ZONE FAULT Feature not installed. CHANNEL FAULT Feature not installed. Contact Harris for assistance diagnosing a fault. NOTE 8. Use to exit back to main screen. 5.9 UTILITY MENU 1. Press to access the main menu. 2. Use 3. Use to highlight and select UTILITY. to highlight and select SELF TEST to run a series of internal radio tests. Status screen appears while testing followed by a screen with passed or failed results. 4. Use 5. Use 6. Use to view details. to scroll through the test results. to exit screen. 7. Use to highlight and select RADIO INFO to view radio information such as software and firmware revisions. 8. Observe radio information display. 9. Use to exit screen. to highlight and select BATTERY INFO. 10. Use 11. Observe voltage for the attached non-smart battery. 12. Use 13. Use to scroll through smart battery status, if smart battery is attached. to exit screen. 14. Use to highlight and select ICON GLOSSARY. 63 14221-1800-2000 15. Observe icon glossary of terms. 16. Use 17. Use to scroll through additional pages. to exit screen. 18. Use 19. Press left or right using to highlight and select FEATURE INFO. tab. From here, you can observe enabled features. to change between the FEATURE DATA tab and the FEATURES 20. Use to exit screen. to highlight and select TCXO TUNING. 21. Use This function only appears if the maintenance password is configured in RPM. 22. Enter the password. This function is for maintenance personnel only. Improper adjustment will result in loss of communications. See Maintenance manual 14221-1100-5000 for proper usage. 23. Use 24. Use to exit screen. to exit main screen. 25. If a P25 channel is selected, use to highlight and select TESTS. Enter the password to access the P25 tests. This function is for maintenance personnel only. 26. Use 27. Use to exit screen. to exit main screen. to highlight and select RSSI. 28. Use 29. Enable or Disable DISPLAY RSSI. When enabled, RSSI is displayed on the RSSI screen and in the bottom right corner of the main display. -130 dBm is displayed when there is no received signal. 5.10 PPP/SLIP The XL-200P can be configured to act as a Mobile Data Terminal (MDT). An MDT is essentially a portable computer capable of transmitting data messages via an RF communications link. Refer to Appendix A for instructions on how to setup PPP and SLIP connections between the radio and a Mobile Data Peripheral (MDP). 64 6. PROGRAMMING 14221-1800-2000 This section provides information on front panel programming. Programming can also be accomplished by creating a plan using a computer with RPM version R9A or later installed. 6.1 PROGRAMMING VIA RPM Radio Personality Manager (RPM) is used for the bulk of programming the XL-200P. With RPM, you can fully program the XL-200P using cable 12082-0410-A1. Ensure that the radio is turned off before connecting the programming cable. After the cable is connected, then power on the radio. NOTE 6.2 BLUETOOTH CLONING Radios with R4A and later firmware support wireless cloning via Bluetooth. Cloning is the ability to fill the configuration or reconfiguration of one radio using another. See Section 5.6.4 for instructions on enabling Bluetooth on the radio. STEP 1:

To clone a Mission Plan, the receiving radio must first be discoverable:

1. Press to access the main menu. 2. Use to highlight and select PROGRAM. 3. Use to select the CLONE PLANS tab and select OPTIONS. 4. Select RECEIVE CLONE. 5. The radio displays RECEIVE CLONE IN PROGRESS. STEP 2:

At the sending radio:

1. Press to access the main menu. 2. Use to highlight and select PROGRAM. 3. On the MISSION PLANS tab, select the plan that you want to clone and select OPTIONS CLONE PLAN (BT). 4. Select the receiving radio from the list of found Bluetooth devices. 5. Accept the Passkey displayed on both radios. On completion of the clone, the transmitting and receiving radios return to the PROGRAM display. 65 14221-1800-2000 6.3 EDIT CHANNEL (CONVENTIONAL ONLY) Channels can be edited from the Channel Information (CH INFO) menu display. Most of the displayed channel parameters can be modified here. Channel edits persist across a power cycle. Loading a mission plan clears any channel edits. Available parameters vary depending on whether the channel is a digital or analog channel. A digital channel allows you to receive digital or analog signals. When transmitting on a digital channel, you can transmit either a digital or analog signal, depending on how the channel is programmed. 1. Press to access the main menu. to scroll through the programmed channel settings. 2. Use 3. Additional settings can be found by scrolling down. 4. Press to select EDIT CHAN. Only authorized users should attempt channel editing. CAUTION 5. Enter the password programmed via RPM. You do not have to re-enter the password until you power cycle the radio. 6. Use to select OK. 7. Use to highlight and select the parameter to edit. For digital channels, modify remaining channel settings:

CHANNEL NAME - Channel name. Up to 16 alpha-numeric characters are allowed. RX FREQUENCY - Receive frequency. Note that if the new frequency is invalid, the display reverts back to the old frequency (Table 6-1). TX FREQUENCY - Transmit frequency. TX POWER Transmit power. Toggle between LOW and HIGH. TALKGROUP Select a talkgroup for the channel. Talkgroup name cannot be set here. RX NAC - Network Access Code (NAC) radio uses for Normal squelch in receive. TX NAC - NAC radio transmits to break Normal squelch on receiving radio. P25 SQUELCH Select type the radio uses in receive. Select NORMAL, SELECTIVE, or MONITOR. RX CHAN GUARD Squelch type radio uses in receive. Select Noise, CTCSS, or CDCSS. For a digital channel, the RX CHAN GUARD is used to receive from a Conventional analog channel that is on the same frequency and uses the selected Channel Guard. RX CODE - Code radio looks to unmute the speaker on the receiving radio when CDCSS squelch is used in conventional mode. RX TONE - Tone radio looks to unmute the speaker on the receiving radio when CTCSS squelch is used in conventional mode. 66 14221-1800-2000 8. For analog channel, modify remaining channel settings:

CHANNEL NAME - Channel name. Up to 16 alpha-numeric characters are allowed. TX FREQUENCY - Transmit frequency. TX POWER Transmit power. Toggle between HIGH and LOW. RX CHAN GUARD Squelch type radio uses in receive. Select Noise, CTCSS, or CDCSS. RX TONE - Tone radio uses to break selective squelch on receiving radio. This is available when RX squelch is set to CTCSS. RX CODE - Code radio uses to break selective squelch on receiving radio. This is available when RX squelch is set to CDCSS. RX CHAN GUARD is not available on this screen if it was enabled from the CALL menu as per Section 4.18. NOTE TX CHAN GUARD Squelch type radio uses in transmit. Select None, CTCSS, or CDCSS. TX TONE - Tone sent by transmitting radio to allow receiving radio to unmute when CTCSS squelch is used in conventional mode. TX CODE - Code sent by transmitting radio to allow receiving radio to unmute when CDCSS squelch is used in conventional mode. TX CHAN GUARD is not available on this screen if it was enabled from the CALL menu as per Section 4.18. NOTE 9. Use to exit menu. An asterisk is displayed in front of the CHANNEL label on the main display when a channel is edited. The asterisk is NOT shown for TX Power or Talkgroup changes. When the only item edited is the TX or RX CHAN GUARD values, and then CHAN GUARD edit is Disabled, the asterisk goes away and the channel is no longer considered edited. This is the only editable item for which this is true. NOTE Table 6-1: Valid Frequencies FREQUENCY RANGE FREQUENCY RESOLUTION 136 - 174 MHz 380 - 520 MHz 762 - 870 MHz 2500, 5000, or 6250 Hz 2500, 5000, or 6250 Hz 6250 kHz 6.4 OTAP (P25 TRUNKED ONLY) Radios with R4A and later software support Over-the-Air-Programming (OTAP) via ProFile Manager. RPM creates, modifies and stores personality information while ProFile Manager delivers the personality over the network to the desired radios. ProFile Manager also contains the ability to read personality information over-the-air and save the files, so that RPM can modify the information if necessary. 67 14221-1800-2000 You can interrupt the programming process, if necessary, by depressing the Push-to-Talk (PTT) button or declaring an emergency. Once a radio personality update is successfully completed, the radio automatically resets itself, switches to the new personality, and returns to normal operation. For more information on using ProFile Manager, refer to software release notes AE/LZT 123 3263/1. 6.5 PROGRAMMABLE BUTTONS AND SWITCHES Programmable Buttons 6.5.1 The programmable buttons are programmed using RPM. A delay of 0 to 10 seconds can be defined in RPM for the programmable buttons in R4A and later software. You can program buttons for the following:

Monitor Toggle Toggles Monitor On/Off. Secure Clear Toggles Encryption Mode On/Off. Front Backlight Toggle Toggles front displays backlight On/Off/Momentary. Top Backlight Toggle - Toggles the top displays backlight On/Off/Momentary. Flashlight Mode Press and hold to turn on the front and top display backlights. Release the button to turn off both displays. Scan Toggles Scan On/Off. Flip Top Display Toggles Top Display Front/Back. Lock Keypad Locks the keypad. Nuisance Delete Performs a Nuisance Delete. See Section 4.29 for more information. Talkaround Toggles Talkaround On/Off. See Section 4.19. Speaker Mute Toggles Speaker Muted/Unmuted. System Up Scrolls up through the list of available systems, stopping at the top of the list. System Down Scrolls down through the list of available systems, stopping when the end of the list is reached. System Up Wrap Scrolls up through the list of available systems, wrapping to the end when the beginning of the list is reached. System Down Wrap Scrolls down through the list of available systems, wrapping to the top when the bottom of the list is reached. Zone Up Scrolls up through the list of available mixed system zones, stopping at the top of the list. If no mixed system zones are defined, or there is only one, the user will hear a deny tone when the button is pressed. Zone Down Scrolls down through the list of available mixed system zones, stopping when the end of the list is reached. If no mixed system zones are defined, or there is only one, the user will hear a deny tone when the button is pressed. Zone Up Wrap Scrolls up through the list of available mixed system zones, wrapping to the end when the beginning of the list is reached. If no mixed system zones are defined, or there is only one, the user will hear a deny tone when the button is pressed. 68 14221-1800-2000 Zone Down Wrap Scrolls down through the list of available mixed system zones, wrapping to the top when the bottom of the list is reached. If no mixed system zones are defined, or there is only one, the user will hear a deny tone when the button is pressed. Select Group Set Select the channel/group bank. If your system has more than 48 channels, this allows you to select a channel group with channels 49-96, 97-144, etc. Drop Call Drop or terminate any group call that the radio receives. Send Status Sends a pre-configured status. See Section 5.8.1 for more information. Send Message Sends a pre-configured message. See Section 5.8.2 for more information. Monitor/Clear Temporarily turn off selected squelch to monitor for traffic that may not normally break squelch. Also, press this button followed by the emergency button to clear an emergency. Programmable /O Switch 6.5.2 The programmable /O switch can be programmed for multiple functions, including:

Switch between encrypted and unencrypted operation. Secure (PVT Enabled). O Clear (PVT Disabled). TX Disable - Switches between Transmit Enable/Disable. Transmit is disabled. O Transmit is enabled. Enable/Disable Talkaround. Talkaround is enabled. O Talkaround is disabled. Lock/Unlock the Keypad. Locks the keypad. O Unlocks the keypad. Start/Stop Scan. Starts Scan. O Stops Scan. Programmable A/B/C Switch 6.5.3 In XGP R3A and later, the A/B/C switch can be programmed for multiple functions using RPM R10B or later. Single-Instance Features:

Single-instance features can only be assigned to one switch position at a time. If one of these features is programmed to the A/B/C switch, other means of accessing that feature are disabled (i.e., two-position switch, shortcut menu, programmable buttons, call menu, etc.). Talkaround (Conventional Systems Only) See Section 4.19. Scan Enables scanning. 69 14221-1800-2000 Tx Power High Sets transmission power level to High. Changing to a Tx Power High position overrides the current personality or user setting for TX Power. Changing from a Tx Power High position restores the personality-configured Tx Power Level. Tx Power Low Sets transmission power level to Low. Changing to a Tx Power Low position overrides the current personality or user setting for TX Power. Changing from a Tx Power Low position restores the personality-configured Tx Power Level. Keypad Lock Locks numeric, #, * and navigation soft keys. Radio Lock - When set, prevents the radio software from responding to the following physical inputs on the radio:

Volume Knob Change (power off is not prevented) 2-Position Switch Channel Knob Side User Programmable Button 1 (yellow button with 3 dots) unless programmed for Monitor/Clear Side User Buttons 2 and 3 (black buttons with 2 dots or 1 dot) Keypad (numeric keys, #, * and navigation/soft keys) Indexed features:

These features can be assigned to any number of positions as long as each index value selected for it is unique across multiple assignments of the same feature; for example, you cant assign a Zone with a particular index (e.g., ZONE A) to both positions A and B. Channel Bank Selects channels 1-16 in position A; 17-32 in position B; and 33-48 in position C. If Channel Bank is selected for any single position, the entire set of 3 positions (A, B, and C) will be set to Channel Bank. NOTE Zone Selection Sets to the Zone index value. When setting the A/B/C switch to an indexed zone assigned position, the radio sets, but does not hold, that zone. This has the resulting effects:

o This sets the channel knob to be zone-based system/channel selection just like selecting a zone from the main Zone menu. If a user then changes to a different system or zone, it will override the radios zone/system/channel selection accordingly and not require it to remain where the switch assignment set it to. o When changing from a Zone assigned position, no actions/changes will be taken by the radio. System Selection Sets to the System index value. When setting the A/B/C switch to an indexed System assigned position, the radio sets, but does not hold, that System. This has the resulting effects:

70 14221-1800-2000 o This sets the channel knob to be system-based channel selection, just like selecting a system from the main Zone menu or ramping up/down using the side user-programmable buttons. If a user then changes to a different system or zone, it will override the radios zone/system/channel selection accordingly and not require it to remain where the switch assignment is set. o When changing from a System assigned position, no actions/changes will be taken by the radio. 71 14221-1800-2000 7. REFERENCE 7.1 MARINE FREQUENCIES Refer to Table 7-1: Marine Frequencies for a list of maritime frequencies per United States Coast Guard

(USCG), National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration (NOAA), and Canadian Department Fisheries and Oceans, August 2009:

United States (US) International (Intl) Canada (CA) Table 7-1: Marine Frequencies FREQUENCY SHIP

(MHZ) T: 156.05 R: 160.65 T/R:

156.05 T: 156.10 R: 160.70 T: 156.15 R: 160.75 T: 156.20 R: 160.80 T/R:

156.20 T: 156.25 R: 160.85 T/R:

156.25 T/R:

156.30 SHORE

(MHZ) T: 160.65 R: 156.05 T/R:

156.05 T: 160.70 R: 156.10 T: 160.75 R: 156.15 T: 160.80 R: 156.20 T/R:

156.20 T: 160.85 R: 156.25 T/R:

156.25 T/R:

156.30 T: 156.35 R: 160.95 T/R:

156.35 T/R:

156.40 T: 160.95 R: 156.35 T/R:

156.35 T/R:

156.40 T/R:

156.45 T/R:

156.45 CHANNEL USAGE International: Public Correspondence, Port Operations US: Port Operations and Commercial, Vessel Traffic Service (VTS). New Orleans/Lower Mississippi area. International: Public Correspondence, Port Operations International: Public Correspondence, Port Operations International: Public Correspondence, Port Operations Canada: Department Fisheries Ocean (DFO)/Canadian Coast Guard only in British Columbia coast area. Commercial fishing in east coast area International: Public Correspondence, Port Operations US: Port Operations or VTS in Houston, New Orleans and Seattle areas. US: Intership Safety International: Intership Canada: May be used for search and rescue communications between ships and aircraft. International: Public Correspondence, Port Operations US: Commercial US: Commercial (Intership only) International: Intership Canada: Also assigned for intership in the Lake Winnipeg area. US: Boater Calling. Commercial and Non-Commercial. International: Intership, Port Operations Canada: Commercial - British Columbia coast area. May be used to communicate with aircraft and helicopters in predominantly maritime support operations. CHANNEL US INTL CA 1 2 3 4a 5a 6 7a 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1a 5a 6 7a 8 9 72 14221-1800-2000 CHANNEL US INTL CA 10 10 10 FREQUENCY SHIP

(MHZ) SHORE

(MHZ) T/R:

156.50 T/R:

156.50 11 11 11 T/R:

156.55 T/R:

156.55 12 12 12 T/R:

156.60 T/R:

156.60 13 13 13 T/R:

156.65 T/R:

156.65 14 14 14 T/R:

156.70 T/R:

156.70 15 15 15 T/R:

156.75 T/R:

156.75 16 16 16 T/R:

156.80 T/R:

156.80 17 17 17 T/R:

156.85 T/R:

156.85 18 T: 156.90 R: 161.50 18a 18a T/R:

156.90 T: 156.95 R: 161.55*

19 19a 19a T/R:

156.95 T: 161.50 R: 156.90 T/R:

156.90 T: 161.55*

R: 156.95 T/R:

156.95 20 20 20 T: 157.00 R: 161.60 T: 161.60 R: 157.00 CHANNEL USAGE US: Commercial International: Intership, Port Operations Canada: Commercial - British Columbia coast area. May also be used for communications with aircraft engaged in coordinated search and rescue and antipollution operations. US: Commercial. VTS in selected areas. International: Port Operations Canada: VTS - British Columbia coast area. Also used for pilotage purposes. US: Port Operations. VTS in selected areas. International: Port Operations Canada: VTS - British Columbia coast area. Also used for pilotage purposes. US: Intership Navigation Safety (Bridge-to-bridge). Ships >20m length maintain a listening watch on this channel in US waters. International: Intership, Port Operations Canada: VTS - British Columbia coast area. Also used for pilotage purposes. US: Port Operations. VTS in selected areas. International: Port Operations Canada: VTS - British Columbia coast area. Also used for pilotage purposes. US: Environmental (Receive only). Used by Class C Emergency Position-

Indicating Radio Beacons (EPIRBs). International: Intership, Port Operations Canada: Port operations and Ship Movement - British Columbia coast area. All operations limited to 1-watt maximum power. May also be used for on-

board communications. US: International Distress, Safety and Calling. Ships required to carry radio, US Coast Guard (USCG), and most coast stations maintain a listening watch on this channel. International: International Distress, Safety and Calling Canada: International Distress, Safety and Calling US: State Control International: Intership, Port Operations Canada: Port operations and Ship Movement - British Columbia coast area. All operations limited to 1 watt maximum power. May also be used for on-

board communications. International: Public Correspondence, Port Operations US: Commercial Canada: Towing - British Columbia coast area. International: Public Correspondence, Port Operations US: Commercial Canada: DFO/Canadian Coast Guard. Pacific Pilots - British Columbia coast area. US: Port Operations (Duplex) International: Public Correspondence, Port Operations Canada: Port operations only with 1 watt maximum power. 73 14221-1800-2000 FREQUENCY CHANNEL US INTL CA 20a 21 SHIP

(MHZ) T/R:

157.00 T: 157.05 R: 161.65*

21a 21a T/R:

157.05

- -

21b 22 T: 157.10 R: 161.70 22a 22a T/R:

157.10 23 23 23a 24 24 25 25 23b 24 25 T: 157.15 R: 161.75 T/R:

157.15

- -

T: 157.20 R: 161.80 T: 157.25 R: 161.85 25b 26 27 28 28b 60 T: 157.30 R: 161.90 T: 157.35 R: 161.95 T: 157.40 R: 162.00

- -

T: 156.025 R: 160.625 T: 156.075 R: 160.675 61a T/R:

156.075 T: 156.125 R: 160.725 62 62a T/R:

156.125 26 26 27 27 28 28 60 61 61a 74 SHORE

(MHZ) T/R:

157.00 T: 161.65*

R: 157.05 T/R:

157.05 T/R:

161.65 T: 161.70 R: 157.10 T/R:

157.10 T: 161.75 R: 157.15 T/R:

157.15 T/R:

161.75 T: 161.80 R: 157.20 T: 161.85 R: 157.25 T/R:

161.85 T: 161.90 R: 157.30 T: 161.95 R: 157.35 T: 162.00 R: 157.40 T/R:

162.00 T: 160.625 R: 156.025 T: 160.675 R: 156.075 T/R:

156.075 T: 160.725 R: 156.125 T/R:

156.125 CHANNEL USAGE US: Port Operations International: Public Correspondence, Port Operations US: US Coast Guard only Canada: DFO/Canadian Coast Guard only. International: Public Correspondence, Port Operations US: Coast Guard Liaison and Maritime Safety Information Broadcasts. Broadcasts announced on channel 16. Canada: For communications between Canadian Coast Guard and non-

Canadian Coast Guard stations only. International: Public Correspondence, Port Operations US: US Coast Guard only Canada: Continuous Marine Broadcast (CMB) service. US: Public Correspondence (Marine Operator) International: Public Correspondence, Port Operations US: Public Correspondence (Marine Operator) International: Public Correspondence, Port Operations Canada: Also assigned for operations in the Lake Winnipeg area. US: Public Correspondence (Marine Operator) International: Public Correspondence, Port Operations US: Public Correspondence (Marine Operator) International: Public Correspondence, Port Operations US: Public Correspondence (Marine Operator) International: Public Correspondence, Port Operations Canada: Continuous Marine Broadcast (CMB) service. International: Public Correspondence, Port Operations International: Public Correspondence, Port Operations Canada: DFO/Canadian Coast Guard only in British Columbia coast area. International: Public Correspondence, Port Operations Canada: DFO/Canadian Coast Guard only in British Columbia coast area. 14221-1800-2000 CHANNEL US INTL CA 63 FREQUENCY SHIP

(MHZ) T: 156.175 R: 160.775 63a 63a T/R:

156.175 64 64 T: 156.225 R: 160.825 64a 64a T/R:

156.225 T: 156.275 R: 160.875 65 65a 65a T/R:

156.275 SHORE

(MHZ) T: 160.775 R: 156.175 T/R:

156.175 T: 160.825 R: 156.225 T/R:

156.225 T: 160.875 R: 156.225 T/R:

156.275 66 T: 156.325 R: 160.925 66a 66a T/R:

156.325 T: 160.925 R: 156.325 T/R:

156.325 67 67 67 T/R:

156.375 T/R:

156.375 68 68 68 T/R:

156.425 T/R:

156.425 69 69 69 T/R:

156.475 T/R:

156.475 70 70 70 T/R:

156.525 T/R:

156.525 71 71 71 T/R:

156.575 T/R:

156.575 72 72 72 T/R:

156.625 T/R:

156.625 CHANNEL USAGE International: Public Correspondence, Port Operations US: Port Operations and Commercial, VTS. New Orleans/Lower Mississippi area. Canada: Tow Boats - British Columbia coast area. International: Public Correspondence, Port Operations Canada: Commercial fishing only. International: Public Correspondence, Port Operations US: Port Operations Canada: Search and rescue and antipollution operations on the Great Lakes. Towing on the Pacific Coast. Port operations only in the St. Lawrence River areas with 1 watt maximum power. Intership in inland Manitoba, Saskatchewan, and Alberta areas. International: Public Correspondence, Port Operations US: Port Operations Canada: Port operations only in the St. Lawrence River/Great Lakes areas with 1 watt maximum power. 1 watt marina channel - British Columbia coast area. US: Commercial. Used for Bridge-to-bridge communications in lower Miss. River. Intership only. International: Intership, Port Operations Canada: May also be used for communications with aircraft engaged in coordinated search and rescue and antipollution operations. Commercial fishing only in east coast and inland Manitoba, Saskatchewan, and Alberta areas. Pleasure craft - British Columbia coast area. US: Non-Commercial International: Port Operations Canada: For marinas, yacht clubs and pleasure craft. US: Non-Commercial International: Intership, Port Operations Canada: Commercial fishing only - east coast area. Pleasure craft - British Columbia coast area. US: Digital Selective Calling (voice communications not allowed) International: Digital selective calling for distress, safety and calling Canada: Digital selective calling for distress, safety and calling US: Non-Commercial International: Port Operations Canada: Ship Movement - British Columbia coast area. Marinas and yacht clubs - east coast and on Lake Winnipeg. US: Non-Commercial (Intership only) International: Intership Canada: May be used to communicate with aircraft and helicopters in predominantly maritime support operations. Pleasure craft - British Columbia coast area 75 14221-1800-2000 CHANNEL US INTL CA 73 73 73 FREQUENCY SHIP

(MHZ) SHORE

(MHZ) T/R:

156.675 T/R:

156.675 74 74 74 T/R:

156.725 T/R:

156.725 75 75 75 T/R:

156.775 T/R:

156.775 76 76 76 T/R:

156.825 T/R:

156.825 77 77 77 T/R:

156.875 T/R:

156.875 T: 161.525 R: 156.925 T/R:

156.925 T: 161.575 R: 156.975 T/R:

156.975 T: 161.625 R: 157.025 T/R:

157.025 T: 161.675 R: 157.075 T/R:

157.075 T: 161.725 R: 157.125 T/R:

157.125 T: 161.775 R: 157.175 T/R:

157.175 T/R:

161.775 78 T: 156.925 R: 161.525 78a 78a T/R:

79 79a 79a T/R:

80 80a 80a T/R:

81 81a 81a T/R:

82 82a 82a T/R:

83 156.925 T: 156.975 R: 161.575 156.975 T: 157.025 R: 161.625 157.025 T: 157.075 R: 161.675 157.075 T: 157.125 R: 161.725 157.125 T: 157.175 R: 161.775 83a T/R:

157.175

- -

83b 83a 76 CHANNEL USAGE US: Port Operations International: Intership, Port Operations Canada: May also be used for communications with aircraft engaged in coordinated search and rescue and antipollution operations. Commercial fishing only in east coast and inland Manitoba, Saskatchewan, and Alberta areas. US: Port Operations International: Port Operations Canada: VTS and Ship Movement British Columbia coast area. International: Port Operations Canada: Simplex port operation, ship movement and navigation related communication only. 1 watt maximum. International: Port Operations Canada: Simplex port operation, ship movement and navigation related communication only. 1 watt maximum. US: Port Operations (Intership only) International: Intership Canada: Pilotage - British Columbia coast area; 25 watts. Port operations only in the St. Lawrence River/Great Lakes areas with 1 watt maximum power. International: Public Correspondence, Port Operations US: Non-Commercial Canada: Fishing Industry - British Columbia coast area. International: Public Correspondence, Port Operations US: Commercial. Non-Commercial in Great Lakes only Canada: Fishing Industry - British Columbia coast area. International: Public Correspondence, Port Operations US: Commercial. Non-Commercial in Great Lakes only Canada: Fishing Industry - British Columbia coast area. International: Public Correspondence, Port Operations US: US Government only - Environmental protection operations Canada: DFO/Canadian Coast Guard use only. International: Public Correspondence, Port Operations US: US. Government only Canada: DFO/Canadian Coast Guard use only. International: Public Correspondence, Port Operations US: US Coast Guard only Canada: DFO/Canadian Coast Guard and other Government agencies. 14221-1800-2000 FREQUENCY SHIP

(MHZ) SHORE

(MHZ) T: 157.225 R: 161.825 T: 157.275 R: 161.875 T: 157.325 R: 161.925 T: 157.375 R: 161.975 T: 161.825 R: 157.225 T: 161.875 R: 157.275 T: 161.925 R: 157.325 T: 161.975 R: 157.375 CHANNEL US INTL CA 84 84 85 85 86 86 87 87 84 85 86 87 87b T/R:

T/R:

157.375 161.975 T: 157.425 R: 162.025 88 88 87a 88a WX1 WX2 WX3 WX4 WX5 WX6 WX7 T/R:

157.425 88b T/R:

162.025 WX1 WX2 WX3 CHANNEL USAGE US: Public Correspondence (Marine Operator) International: Public Correspondence, Port Operations US: Public Correspondence (Marine Operator) International: Public Correspondence, Port Operations US: Public Correspondence (Marine Operator) International: Public Correspondence, Port Operations US: Automatic Identification System duplex repeater International: Port Operations Canada: Port operation and ship movement - east coast area. Pleasure craft - British Columbia coast area. US: Public Correspondence (Marine Operator) Canada: Automatic Ship Identification and Surveillance System. US: Commercial, Intership only. International: Port Operations Canada: Port operation and ship movement - British Columbia coast area. US: Commercial, Intership only. Canada: Automatic Ship Identification and Surveillance System. T/R:

157.375 T/R:

161.975 T: 162.025 R: 157.425 T/R:

157.425 T/R:

162.025 R: 162.55 R: 162.4 R: 162.475 R: 162.425 R: 162.45 R: 162.5 R: 162.525 7.2 NARROWBANDING The FCC has mandated that all public safety radios manufactured after January 1, 2013 comply with narrowbanding restrictions (see http://transition.fcc.gov/pshs/public-safetyspectrum/narrowbanding.html for more information). Radios manufactured after the above date will comply with these restrictions. Existing radio personalities that contain frequencies that violate the new FCC rules will cause an invalid channel error indication on the radio display. The user will need to change the radio personality to comply with the new rules. Note that there are multiple exceptions to the narrowbanding mandate, including the Marine Frequencies listed in Section 7.1. 77 14221-1800-2000 8. GLOSSARY AES AES-256 AMBE+2 ANSI ASCII C CA CDCSS CH INFO CKR CMB CTCSS DES DES-OFB DFO DMS

-A-

Advanced Encryption Standard Advanced Encryption Standard, 256-bit Advanced Multi-Band Excitation implementation 2 American National Standards Institute American Standard Code for Information Interchange

-B-

-C-

Celsius Canada Continuous Digital Coded Squelch System Channel Information Common Key References Continuous Marine Broadcast Continuous Tone Coded Squelch System

-D-

Digital Encryption Standard Digital Encryption Standard Output Feedback Department Fisheries Ocean Degrees Minutes Seconds

-E-

EPIRB Emergency Position-Indicating Radio Beacons F FCC FM Fahrenheit Federal Communications Commission Frequency Modulation

-F-

GHz GEOTRANS Geographic Translator GPS Giga (109) Hertz Global Positioning System Hertz Harris Key Loader

-G-

-H-

-I-

Identification Institute of Electrical & Electronics Engineers International

-J-

Hz HKL ID IEEE INTL 78 14221-1800-2000 KEK kHz KID KMF KMS KS KVL

-K-

Key Encryption Key kilo (103) Hertz Key Identification Key Management Facility Key Management System Key Set Key Variable Loader (Motorola KVL Device)

-L-

LAT/LONG DMS LED Li-ION Latitude/Longitude Degrees Minutes Seconds Light Emitting Diode Lithium-ION MHz mm MR ms NAC Ni-MH NOAA OET OTAR P25 POS PRI PTT RF RPM RSI RSM RX SA SMA TIA TX Megahertz Millimeter Mobile Radio milli (10-3) seconds

-M-

-N-

Network Access Code Nickel Metal Hydride National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration

-O-

Office of Engineering and Technology Over The Air Rekey Project 25 Position Priority (Channel) Push-to-Talk

-P-

-Q-

-R-

Radio Frequency Radio Personality Manager Radio Set Identifier Remote Speaker Microphone Receive Situational Awareness Subminiature version A

-S-

-T-

Telecommunications Industry Association Transmit 79 14221-1800-2000 UHF UKEK US USCG UTC UTM VDC VHF VIDA VTS

-U-

Ultra High Frequency Unique Key Encryption Key United States United States Coast Guard Universal Time Coordinated Universal Transverse Mercator

-V-

Volts, Direct Current Very High Frequency Voice Interoperability Data Access Vessel Traffic Service

-W-

WEEE Waste from Electric and Electronic Equipment

-X-

-Y-

-Z-

80 14221-1800-2000 9. BASIC TROUBLESHOOTING 9.1 ERROR MESSAGES This section provides a list of error messages, as well as possible causes and solutions. SCREEN TEXT REASON DELETE NOT ALLOWED Nuisance delete not allowed on current channel. EMERGENCY ACTIVE SCAN DISABLED OTAR REKEY FAILED OTAR ZEROIZE FAILED NO OTAR KEK LOADED INVALID OTAR KEYSETS INVALID KEYSTORE ZEROIZE NEEDED Top Level Display Cannot scan when transmitting an emergency. Self-explanatory OTAR configuration failed because keysets were improperly configured. RESOLUTION Requires new personality configuration (either Limited/Programmable scan lists or Keypad P1/P2 channels). Exit emergency to start scanning. Attempt OTAR operation again. Attempt OTAR operation again. Load valid KEK before attempting OTAR. Zeroize keys and reload KEK(s) before attempting OTAR. Corrupt key database. Zeroize database. SYNTH OUT OF LOCK DSP synthesizer out of lock. SYNTH OUT OF LOCK POWER CYCLE RADIO DSP synthesizer out of lock - unable to restore by reselecting channel. TEXTLINK SEND FAILED Failure to send a Radio TextLink message due to a data communication problem. PAIRING FAILED Bluetooth pairing failed. Channel will reselect automatically to attempt to obtain synth lock. Unable to obtain synthesizer lock. Power cycle radio and contact Harris if problem persists. Troubleshoot the data connection between the radio and site. Ping the radio to verify the data connection. Ensure device is discoverable and attempt to re-pair the device. PIN CODE MUST HAVE AT LEAST 4 DIGITS EDIT FAILED INVALID RX FREQUENCY INVALID TX FREQUENCY INVALID CODE The PIN entered is too short. Enter at least four digits. Unable to modify P25 Channel Entered Rx frequency is invalid. Entered Tx frequency is invalid. Power cycle and try again--

contact Harris if problem persists. Ensure frequency follows band spacing rules. Ensure frequency follows band spacing rules. Code entered is not a valid CDCSS code. Ensure code is valid. Bluetooth Pairing Screen Channel Edit Screen Mission Plan List Screen NAME ALREADY EXISTS EMERGENCY ACTIVE FILL DISABLED The channel name is already used. Enter a new channel name. Cannot activate mission plans when transmitting an emergency. Exit emergency to activate a new mission plan. 81 14221-1800-2000 SCREEN TEXT REASON RESOLUTION INSTALL NOT ALLOWED Error during install process. Install Operations EXTRACTION FAILED Extraction of compressed file failed. Mission Plan In Progress Screen Security Menu Utilities Menu Channel Info Screen REMOVE FAILED Removal of existing software failed. PLAN FAILED Mission plan activation failed. ZEROIZE FAILED DSP could not zeroize. NO KEYS TO ZEROIZE Key database empty. INCORRECT PASSWORD INCORRECT PASSWORD Channel edit password invalid. Maintenance password invalid. Transfer the file again and reattempt install. Contact Harris if problem persists. Transfer file again and reattempt install. Contact Harris if problem persists. Attempt to install again and contact Harris if problem persists. Use RPM to ensure plan validity. Contact Harris if failures persist. DSP problem power cycle the radio and contact Harris if problem persists. Nothing to zeroize. Enter a valid maintenance password. Enter valid channel edit password. 9.2 OTAR ERRORS/INFORMATION WORKAROUNDS:

1. Zeroize. 2. Load proper KEK from the Motorola KVL or Harris Key Loader. IF RADIO INDICATES:

1. INVALID KEYSTORE ZEROIZE NEEDED:

This occurs if the radios keys were loaded by the Harris Key Loader followed by an attempt to load UKEKs with the Key Loader or keys with the Motorola KVL. Fix by performing workaround 1, followed by 2. 2. NO UKEK Displayed during a zeroize performed from the radio or a zeroize initiated from the KMF.

- Fix by performing workaround 2. 3. Zeroize Complete KMF has zeroized the radio.

- Fix by performing workaround 2. 4. Disabled OTAR Icon (red slash) OTAR is disabled while in scan, talkaround, emergency, and monitor.

- Fix by disabling these features. Icon will be corrected (no red slash). 5. Gray OTAR Icon (no red slash) OTAR has not registered with tower (Conventional or Trunked system).

- Fix by verifying proper frequencies.

-

If the radio is turned to the OTAR channel out of range of a conventional tower, and then comes in range after 3 minutes, fix by issuing an OTAR. Rekey, leaving and re-enter the OTAR channel. 82 14221-1800-2000 6. Green OTAR Icon OTAR is registered, all is well.

-

If update fails, verify you are in range of the tower and the KEK is correct. 7. Blue OTAR Icon OTAR is attempting to rekey.

-

If rekey fails, verify you are in range of the tower and the KEK is correct. 10. TECHNICAL ASSISTANCE The Technical Assistance Center's (TAC) resources are available to help with overall system operation, maintenance, upgrades and product support. TAC is the point of contact when answers are needed to technical questions. Product specialists, with detailed knowledge of product operation, maintenance and repair provide technical support via a toll-free (in North America) telephone number. Support is also available through mail, fax and e-mail. For more information about technical assistance services, contact your sales representative, or contact the Technical Assistance Center directly at:

North America:

International:

Fax:

E-mail:

1-800-528-7711 1-434-385-2400 1-434-455-6712 PSPC_tac@harris.com 83 14221-1800-2000 11. WARRANTY Please register this product within 10 days of purchase. Registration validates the warranty coverage, and enables Harris to contact you in case of any safety notifications issued for this product. Registration can be made on-line at the Customer Care center webpage:

http://www.pspc.harris.com/Service/Customerservice.aspx. While on the webpage, please review the applicable battery and/or product literature. warranty 84 14221-1800-2000 APPENDIX A PPP/SLIP CONNECTION A.1 OVERALL CONFIGURATION This appendix describes how to setup PPP and SLIP connections between a Portable radio acting as a Mobile Data Terminal (MDT) and a Mobile Data Peripheral (MDP). The MDP in Figure A-1 is a Windows XP machine. This example is used throughout the configuration, but is only intended as a guide. It is important to realize that all IP addresses are site/configuration specific. Prior to configuring the MDT or the MDP, the system administrator should provide configuration specifics. Figure A-1: Example of PPP/SLIP Configuration MDP PPP IP Address There are two types of configuration for the MDPs IP address, dynamically assigned by PPP or statically assigned within the MDPs PPP configuration settings:

Dynamic via PPP (shown in Figure A-1) - When using PPPs dynamic IP address assignment, the radio will assign its own RF IP address to the MDP. Outbound IP data from the site will be processed by the radio if the port matches the ports within the radios services (Radio Textlink, OTAR, OTAP, etc.). All other outbound IP data from the site is forwarded to the MDP. Inbound IP data from the MDP will be processed by the radio if the MDP uses the radios PPP IP address;

otherwise, it will be forwarded to the site. Static The MDP software allows the configuration of a static IP address to the MDP. While this provides more configurability, routing of traffic to the MDP from the site must be configured within the sites routers. MDTs PPP IP This is typically a nonce IP address (shown in Figure A-1) to allow the MDP to address the radio explicitly (i.e., ping). MDTs RF IP This IP address is how the site addresses the radio and must match configuration at the site. Other IP addresses in the figure above are beyond the scope of this configuration document and are provided for the purpose of the configuration example only. 85 14221-1800-2000 A.2 RADIO CONFIGURATION 1. Use RPM to configure MDT services, PPP IP address, and RF IP address. 2. Within Data Options Data Interfaces tab, enable MDT and configure the MDTs PPP address:

Enable MDT Services MDTs PPP IP Address MDT Modem Configuration 3. Within the Data Options, Data Transport tab, configure the MDTs RF IP3

. MDTs RF IP Address 3 If the MDP will be configured to have the radio provide the IP address (dynamic PPP IP address assignment), it is important to set the RF IP Address even if the site will dynamically assign it. Otherwise, the radio will fail PPP negotiation until the radio has registered with the site. 86 14221-1800-2000 A.3 MDP PPP CONFIGURATION (WINDOWS XP) Windows XP Modem Configuration A.3.1 The following configures a modem that will be used for the PPP connection on a Windows XP Mobile Data Peripheral. 1. Open the Control Panel (StartSettingsControl Panel). 2. Select Phone and Modem Options. 3. Choose Modems tab. 4. Select Add button. 5. Choose Dont detect my modem; I will select it from a list. 6. Choose Next >. 7. Choose the [Standard Modem Types] that corresponds the speed of the radio as configured in the RPM. For a 19200 bps connection, choose Standard 19200 bps Modem. Choosing a modem speed faster than the over-the-air bit rate removes the overhead incurred by PPP layer framing. 8. Choose Next >. 9. Choose the port the radio is connected to. 87 14221-1800-2000 10. Choose Next >. 11. Windows will install the driver. Click Finish when completed. Windows XP Dial-Up Connection A.3.2 The following configures a dial up connection to use the Windows XP Mobile Data Peripherals modem. 1. Open the Control Panel (StartSettingsControl Panel). 2. Open Network Connections. 3. Choose FileNew Connection. 4. When the wizard starts, choose Next >. 5. Choose Connect to the network at my workplace. If this is the only data connection for this machine, choose Connect to the Internet instead. NOTE 88 14221-1800-2000 6. Choose Next >. 7. Choose Dial-up connection. 8. Choose Next >. 9. Choose a Name for the connection. This is for informational purposes only and is the name that the connection will use within the Network Connection window. In this particular case, the radio name and the IP address assigned to that radio has been chosen as an indicator (XL-200P 10.1.101.209). 10. Choose Next >. 11. Choose a non-empty phone number for the connection. 12. Choose Next >. 13. Choose Do not use my smart card. 14. Choose Next >. 15. Choose Anyones use. 16. Choose Next >. 17. Choose Finish. 89 14221-1800-2000 18. The following dialog is displayed:

19. Choose either Cancel or Properties. If Properties is chosen, proceed with Section A.3.3, Configuring a PPP Dial-up Connection, step 3. A.3.3 Windows XP PPP or SLIP Configuration Configuring a PPP Dial-up Connection PPP connection is preferred over SLIP in most windows configurations as it allows for dynamic address assignment from the radio as well as frame validation. NOTE 1. Open the Control Panel (StartSettingsControl Panel). 2. Select the Dial-up connection that was just created. 90 14221-1800-2000 3. Select FileProperties, and specify any Phone number.4 Any phone number will do. 4. Choose Configure. Verify that settings and baud rate match the RPM configuration for the radio. 4 It is important to specify a Phone number: or XP will not start the connection process. 91 14221-1800-2000 5. Choose OK. 6. Choose the Options tab. 7. Deselect Prompt for name and password, certificate, etc. Deselect Prompt for phone number. Choose Idle time before hanging up: to be never. Select Redial if line is dropped. 8. Choose the Security tab and verify the settings shown on the following screen. 92 14221-1800-2000 9. Choose the Networking tab. 10. Choose the Type of dial-up server I am calling: to be PPP: Windows 95/98/NT4/2000, Internet. Deselect Client for Microsoft Networks. 11. Choose Settings located beneath the PPP:Windows 95/98/NT 4/2000, Internet selection. 12. Uncheck all options. 93 14221-1800-2000 13. Choose OK. The previous Networking tab properties window will be accessible again. 14. Select Internet Protocol (TCP/IP). 15. Choose Properties. Dynamic or Use MDTs RF IP Address 16. Select Obtain an IP address automatically unless the radio will be defining its own IP address. If this is specified, it must match the PPP/SLIP address within RPM (often defaulted to:

199.81.106.100). Check with the system administrator regarding specifying a static IP address. 17. Choose Advanced. 18. Deselect Use default gateway on remote network and deselect Use IP header compression. 94 14221-1800-2000 19. Choose OK. The DNS and WINS tabs remain unchanged. 20. Choose OK to accept the IP address and advanced settings. 21. Choose OK to accept the Network Connections Properties. Configuring a SLIP Dial-up Connection 1. Follow PPP connection setup through step 8. 2. Choose the Networking tab. 3. Select Type of dial-up server I am calling: to be SLIP: Unix Connection. 95 14221-1800-2000 4. Since SLIP does not allow dynamic address assignment, select Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) and choose Properties. MDTs RF IP Address 5. Specify the IP address after consulting with the system administrator. 6. Choose OK. 7. Choose OK. A.3.4 Windows XP Route Configuration Notes 1. After the PPP has connected run the following commands:

The italicized IP address (i.e., 10.1.100.209) is the radios RF IP address as configured in RPM and the site. The bold IP address (i.e., 199.81.106.0) is a submask built off of the radios PPP IP address. NOTE a. route add 199.81.106.0 MASK 255.255.255.0 10.1.100.209 /p b. ping 199.81.106.100 -n 1 2. Description of commands:

a. This route addition allows access to GPS over PPP. The RPM defaults to this nonce IP address. If RPM specifies something different, this will need to be updated. The /p makes the IP address permanent. b. The ping should work. 96 14221-1800-2000 This page intentionally left blank. 97 Public Safety and Professional Communications | www.pspc.harris.com 221 Jefferson Ridge Parkway | Lynchburg, VA USA 24501 | 1-800-528-7711 Product Safety Manual 14221-1800-2010 Feb/15 This booklet contains important safety information regarding specific absorption rate (SAR) and RF exposure limits included in United States and international standards. Read the information in this booklet before operating your radio. XL-200P Series Portable Radios REV

-

DATE Feb/15 Initial release. DESCRIPTION ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS The software contained in this device is copyrighted by Harris Corporation. Unpublished rights are reserved under the copyright laws of the United States. This device is made under license under one or more of the following US patents: 4,590,473;

4,636,791; 5,148,482; 5,185,796; 5,271,017; 5,377,229; 4,716,407; 4,972,460; 5,502,767;

5,146,497; 5,164,986; 5,185,795; 5,226,084; 5,247,579; 5,491,772; 5,517,511; 5,630,011;

5,649,050; 5,701,390; 5,715,365; 5,754,974; 5,826,222; 5,870,405; 6,161,089; and 6,199,037 B1. DVSI claims certain rights, including patent rights under aforementioned U.S. patents, and under other U.S. and foreign patents and patents pending. Any use of this software or technology requires a separate written license from DVSI. CREDITS Harris, EDACS, OpenSky, and assuredcommunications are registered trademarks and ProVoice is a trademark of Harris Corporation. RBRC and 1-800-8-BATTERY are registered trademarks of Rechargeable Battery Recycling Corporation. AMBE is a registered trademark and IMBE, AMBE+, and AMBE+2 are trademarks of Digital Voice Systems, Inc. All other product and brand names are trademarks, registered trademarks, or service marks of their respective holders. NOTICE The material contained herein is subject to U.S. export approval. No export or re-export is permitted without written approval from the U.S. Government. Rated: EAR99; in accordance with U.S. Dept. of Commerce regulations 15CFR774, Export Administration Regulations. Information and descriptions contained herein are the property of Harris Corporation. Such information and descriptions may not be copied or reproduced by any means, or disseminated or distributed without the express prior written permission of Harris Corporation, PS&PC Division, 221 Jefferson Ridge Parkway, Lynchburg, VA 24501. This product conforms to the European Union WEEE Directive 2002/96/EC. Do not dispose of this product in a public landfill. This product should be taken to a recycling center at the end of its life. The voice coding technology embodied in this product is protected by intellectual property rights including patent rights, copyrights, and trade secrets of Digital Voice Systems, Inc. The user of this technology is explicitly prohibited from attempting to decompile, reverse engineer, or disassemble the Object Code, or in any other way convert the Object Code into human-readable form. Repairs to this equipment should be made only by an authorized service technician or facility designated by the supplier. Any repairs, alterations, or substitution of recommended parts made by the user to this equipment not approved by the manufacturer could void the users authority to operate the equipment in addition to the manufacturers warranty. This manual is published by Harris Corporation, without any warranty. Improvements and changes to this manual necessitated by typographical errors, inaccuracies of current information, or improvements to programs and/or equipment, may be made by Harris Corporation, at any time and without notice. Such changes will be incorporated into new editions of this manual. No part of this manual may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, including photocopying and recording, for any purpose, without the express written permission of Harris Corporation. Copyright 2015 Harris Corporation. 2 14221-1800-2010 TABLE OF CONTENTS Page 1. REGULATORY AND SAFETY INFORMATION .................................... 4 1.1 SAFETY SYMBOL CONVENTIONS .................................................. 4 SAFETY TRAINING INFORMATION ................................................ 4 1.2 1.3 REGULATORY APPROVALS ............................................................ 6 1.4 OPERATING TIPS ................................................................................ 7 2. RENSEIGNEMENTS SUR LA RGLEMENTATION ET SCURIT .. 9 2.1 CONVENTIONS SUR LES SYMBOLES DE SCURIT .................. 9 2.2 RENSEIGNEMENTS SUR LA FORMATION SUR LA SCURIT 10 2.3 INTERFRENCE DES RADIOFRQUENCES ................................. 12 2.4 CONSEILS DUTILISATION ............................................................ 12 3. OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES ................................................................ 14 4. BATTERY PACKS ...................................................................................... 15 4.1 CONDITIONING NIMH BATTERY PACKS .................................... 15 4.2 CONDITIONING LITHIUM BATTERY PACKS .............................. 16 4.3 STORING LI-ION BATTERY PACKS .............................................. 16 4.4 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION ........................................................ 16 4.5 BATTERY DISPOSAL ....................................................................... 16 5. TECHNICAL ASSISTANCE ...................................................................... 17 6. WARRANTY ................................................................................................ 17 Harris Corporation, Public Safety and Professional Communications (PSPC) Business continually evaluates its technical publications for completeness, technical accuracy, and organization. You can assist in this process by submitting your comments and suggestions to the following:

Harris Corporation PSPC Business Technical Publications 221 Jefferson Ridge Parkway or Lynchburg, VA 24501 or fax your comments to: 1-434-455-6851 e-mail us at:

PSPC_techpubs@harris.com 14221-1800-2010 3 1. REGULATORY AND SAFETY INFORMATION 1.1 SAFETY SYMBOL CONVENTIONS The following conventions are used to alert the user to general safety precautions that must be observed during all phases of operation, service, and repair of this product. Failure to comply with these precautions or with specific warnings elsewhere violates safety standards of design, manufacture, and intended use of the product. Harris assumes no liability for the customer's failure to comply with these standards. The WARNING symbol calls attention to a procedure, practice, or the like, which, if not correctly performed or adhered to, could result in personal injury. Do not proceed beyond a WARNING symbol until the conditions identified are fully understood or met. The CAUTION symbol calls attention to an operating procedure, practice, or the like, which, if not performed correctly or adhered to, could result in a risk of danger, damage to the equipment performance. the equipment, or severely degrade The NOTE supplemental information, which may improve system performance or clarify a process or procedure. symbol calls attention to WARNING CAUTION NOTE 1.2 SAFETY TRAINING INFORMATION The Harris XL-200P portable radio generates RF electromagnetic energy during transmit mode. This radio is designed for and classified as Occupational Use Only, meaning it must be used only during the course of employment by individuals aware of the hazards and the ways to minimize such hazards. This radio is NOT intended for use by the General Population in an uncontrolled environment. WARNING The XL-200P portable radio has been tested and complies with the FCC RF exposure limits for Occupational Use Only. In addition, this radio complies with the following Standards and Guidelines with regard to RF energy and 4 14221-1800-2010 electromagnetic energy levels and evaluation of such levels for exposure to humans:

FCC OET Bulletin 65 Edition 97-01 Supplement C, Evaluating Compliance with FCC Guidelines for Human Exposure to Radio Frequency Electromagnetic Fields. American National Standards American National Standards Institute (C95.1 1992), IEEE Standard for Safety Levels with Respect to Human Exposure to Radio Frequency Electromagnetic Fields, 3 kHz to 300 GHz. Institute IEEE Recommended Practice for the Measurement of Potentially Hazardous Electromagnetic Fields RF and Microwave. IC Standard RSS-102, Issue 4, 2010: Spectrum Management and Telecommunications Radio Standards Specification. Radio frequency Exposure Compliance of Radio communication Apparatus

(All Frequency Bands).

(C95.3 1992), 1.2.1 RF Exposure Guidelines To ensure that exposure to RF electromagnetic energy is within the FCC allowable limits for occupational use, always adhere to the following guidelines:

CAUTION DO NOT operate the radio without a proper antenna attached, as this may damage the radio and may also cause the FCC RF exposure limits to be exceeded. A proper antenna is the antenna supplied with this radio by Harris or an antenna specifically authorized by Harris for use with this radio. DO NOT transmit for more than 50% of total radio use time (50% duty cycle). Transmitting more than 50% of the time can cause FCC RF exposure compliance requirements to be exceeded. The radio is transmitting when the TX indicator appears in the display. The radio will transmit by pressing the PTT (Push-To-Talk) button. ALWAYS transmit using low power when possible. In addition to conserving battery charge, low power can reduce RF exposure. ALWAYS use Harris authorized accessories (antennas, batteries, belt clips, speaker/mics, etc). Use of unauthorized accessories may cause the FCC Occupational/Controlled Exposure RF compliance requirements to be exceeded. (Refer to Table 1-1.) As noted in Table 1-1, ALWAYS keep the housing of the transmitter AT LEAST 0.47 inches (1.2 cm) from the body and at least 0.98 inches (2.5 cm) from the face when transmitting to ensure FCC RF exposure compliance requirements are not exceeded. However, to provide the best sound quality to the recipients of your transmission, Harris recommends 14221-1800-2010 5 you hold the microphone at least 5 cm (2 inches) from mouth, and slightly off to one side. Table 1-1: RF Exposure Compliance Tested Distances RADIO FREQUENCY BAND VHF

(136174 MHz) UHF

(378522 MHz) 700/800 MHz

(768-776 MHz)

(798-806 MHz)

(806-816 MHz)

(851-861 MHz) TESTED DISTANCES

(worst case scenario) Face Body1 0.47 in (1.2 cm) 0.98 in (2.5 cm) 0.47 in (1.2 cm) 0.98 in (2.5 cm) 0.47 in (1.2 cm) 0.98 in (2.5 cm) The information in this section provides the information needed to make the user aware of a RF exposure, and what to do to assure that this radio operates within the FCC RF exposure limits of this radio. Electromagnetic Interference/Compatibility 1.2.2 During transmissions, Harris radios generate RF energy that can possibly cause interference with other devices or systems. To avoid such interference, turn off the radios in areas where signs are posted to do so. DO NOT operate the transmitter in areas that are sensitive to electromagnetic radiation such as hospitals, aircraft, and blasting sites. 1.3 REGULATORY APPROVALS Part 15 1.3.1 This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and 2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Industry Canada 1.3.2 This device complies with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not 1 This is worst case based on the thinnest body mount accessory (belt clip). 6 14221-1800-2010 cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. 1.4 OPERATING TIPS Antenna location and condition are important when operating a portable radio. Operating the radio in low lying areas or terrain, under power lines or bridges, inside of a vehicle or in a metal framed building can severely reduce the range of the unit. Mountains can also reduce the range of the unit. In areas where transmission or reception is poor, some improvement may be obtained by ensuring the antenna is vertical. Moving a few yards in another direction or moving to a higher elevation may also improve communications. Vehicular operation can be aided with the use of an externally mounted antenna. Battery condition is another important factor in the trouble free operation of a portable radio. Always properly charge the batteries. Efficient Radio Operation 1.4.1 Keep the antenna in a vertical position when receiving or transmitting a message. Do NOT hold onto the antenna when the radio is powered on. WARNING 1.4.1.1 Antenna Care and Replacement WARNING WARNING Always keep the antenna at least 0..47 inches (1.2 cm) away from the body and 0.98 inches (2.5 cm) from the face when transmitting to ensure FCC RF exposure compliance requirements are not exceeded. Do not use the portable radio with a damaged or missing antenna. A minor burn may result if skin comes into contact with a damaged antenna. Replace a damaged antenna immediately. Operating a portable radio with the antenna missing could cause personal injury, damage the radio, and may violate FCC regulations. Use only the supplied or approved antenna. Unauthorized antennas, modifications, or attachments could cause damage to the radio unit and may violate FCC regulations. CAUTION 14221-1800-2010 7 1.4.1.2 Electronic Devices RF energy from portable radios may affect some electronic equipment. Most modern electronic equipment in cars, hospitals, homes, etc., are shielded from RF energy. However, in areas in which you are instructed to turn off two-way radio equipment, always observe the rules. If in doubt, turn it off!

CAUTION 1.4.1.3 Aircraft Always turn off a portable radio before boarding any aircraft!

Use it on the ground only with crew permission. DO NOT use while in-flight!!

WARNING 1.4.1.4 Electric Blasting Caps To prevent accidental detonation of electric blasting caps, DO NOT use two-way radios within 1000 feet of blasting operations. Always obey the "Turn Off Two-Way Radios"

signs posted where electric blasting caps are being used.

(OSHA Standard: 1926.900) WARNING 1.4.1.5 Potentially Explosive Atmospheres Areas with potentially explosive atmospheres are often, but not always, clearly marked. These may be fuelling areas, such as gas stations, fuel or chemical transfer or storage facilities, and areas where the air contains chemicals or particles, such as grain, dust, or metal powders. Sparks in such areas could cause an explosion or fire resulting in bodily injury or even death. Turn OFF two-way radios when in any area with a potentially explosive atmosphere. It is rare, but not impossible that a radio or its accessories could generate sparks. WARNING 8 14221-1800-2010 2. RENSEIGNEMENTS SUR LA RGLEMENTATION ET SCURIT 2.1 CONVENTIONS SUR LES SYMBOLES DE SCURIT Les conventions suivantes sont utilises dans le prsent manuel pour avertir lutilisateur des prcautions gnrales de scurit qui doivent tre observes pendant toutes les phases dopration, dentretien et de rparation de ce produit. Le non-respect de ces prcautions ou davertissements prciss ailleurs enfreint les normes de scurit de la conception, de la fabrication et de lutilisation prvue du produit. Harris nassume aucune responsabilit pour le non-respect de ces normes par le client. Le symbole MISE EN GARDE attire lattention sur une procdure ou une pratique qui, si elle nest pas correctement effectue ou observe, pourrait entraner une blessure personnelle. Ne pas poursuivre au-del dun symbole de MISE EN GARDE avant que les conditions identifies soient compltement comprises ou satisfaites. Le symbole AVERTISSEMENT attire lattention sur une procdure ou une pratique oprationnelle qui, si elle nest pas correctement effectue ou observe, pourrait entraner un bris dquipement ou une importante baisse de rendement de lquipement. Le symbole REMARQUE attire lattention sur des renseignements supplmentaires qui peuvent amliorer le rendement du systme ou clarifier un processus ou une procdure. MISE EN GARDE AVERTISSEMENT REMARQUE 14221-1800-2010 9 2.2 RENSEIGNEMENTS SUR LA FORMATION SUR LA SCURIT des RF lorsquen mode La radio portative Harris XL-200P produit de lnergie lectromagntique de transmission. Cette radio est conue et classe pour une Utilisation professionnelle seulement , ce qui signifie quelle ne doit tre utilise que dans le cadre dun emploi par des individus conscients des risques et des moyens de limiter ceux-ci. Cette radio NEST PAS conue pour une utilisation par la Population gnrale dans un environnement non contrl. MISE EN GARDE La radio portative XL-200P a t teste et est conforme aux limites dexposition aux RF de la FCC pour une Utilisation professionnelle seulement . De plus, cette radio Harris est conforme aux normes et directives suivantes quant lnergie des RF et aux niveaux dnergie lectromagntique, ainsi qu lvaluation de ces niveaux pour lexposition aux humains :

Bulletin 65 du OET de la FCC, dition 97-01, supplment C, portant sur lvaluation de la conformit aux directives de la FCC quant lexposition des radiofrquences. lectromagntiques humaine champs aux American National Standards Institute (C95.1 1992), norme de lIEEE les niveaux scuritaires dexposition humaine aux champs sur lectromagntiques des radiofrquences, 3 kHz 300 GHz. American National Standards Institute (C95.3 1992), pratique recommande par lIEEE pour la mesure des champs lectromagntiques potentiellement dangereux RF et micro-ondes. 2.2.1 Directives sur lexposition aux RF Pour sassurer que lexposition lnergie lectromagntique des RF se situe dans les limites acceptables de la FCC pour lutilisation professionnelle, respectez toujours les directives suivantes :

AVERTISSEMENT Nutilisez PAS la radio sans quune antenne approprie y soit connecte, car ceci peut endommager la radio et galement causer un dpassement des limites dexposition aux RF de la FCC. Une antenne approprie est celle fournie par Harris avec cette radio, ou une antenne spcifiquement autorise par Harris pour tre utilise avec cette radio. 10 14221-1800-2010 Ne transmettez PAS pendant plus de 50 % de la dure dutilisation totale de la radio ( cycle de service de 50 % ). La transmission pendant plus de 50 % du temps peut causer un dpassement des exigences de conformit de la FCC en matire dexposition aux RF. La radio transmet lorsque lindicateur TX apparat sur laffichage. La radio transmet lorsquon appuie sur le bouton PTT (bouton de microphone). Transmettez TOUJOURS en basse puissance lorsque possible. En plus de prserver la charge de la pile, une faible puissance rduit lexposition aux RF. Utilisez TOUJOURS des accessoires autoriss Harris (antennes, piles, pinces de ceinture, haut-parleurs/micros, etc.). Lutilisation daccessoires non autoriss peut entraner un dpassement des exigences de conformit pour une exposition aux RF professionnelle ou contrle de la FCC.

(Reportez-vous Tableau 2-1.) Tel quindiqu dans Tableau 2-1, conservez TOUJOURS lappareil et son antenne AU MOINS 1,2 cm (0,47 po) du corps, et au moins 2,5 cm

(0,98 po) du visage pendant la transmission, pour vous assurer de ne pas dpasser les exigences de conformit de la FCC en matire dexposition aux RF. Cependant, pour offrir la meilleure qualit sonore aux auditeurs de votre transmission, Harris recommande de tenir le microphone au moins 5 cm (2 po) de votre bouche et lgrement dplac sur un ct. Tableau 2-1 : Distances de test de conformit des expositions aux RF RADIOFRQUENCES VHF

(136174 MHz) UHF

(378522 MHz) 700/800 MHz

(768-776 MHz)

(798-806 MHz)

(806-816 MHz)

(851-861 MHz) DISTANCES TESTES

(pire des scnarios) Corps2 1,2 cm 1,2 cm Visage 2,5 cm 2,5 cm 1,2 cm 2,5 cm Dans cette section figurent les renseignements ncessaires pour sensibiliser lutilisateur lexposition aux RF et sur ce quil faut faire pour sassurer que cette radio fonctionne dans les limites dexposition aux RF de la FCC. 2 Ce est le pire des cas base sur le corps plus mince monter accessoire (clip ceinture). 14221-1800-2010 11 Interfrence/Compatibilit lectromagntique 2.2.2 Pendant les transmissions, cette radio Harris produit de lnergie des RF qui peut causer de linterfrence avec dautres appareils ou systmes. Pour viter de telles interfrences, fermez la radio dans les zones o il est indiqu de le faire. Nutilisez PAS le transmetteur dans des zones sensibles aux radiations lectromagntiques, comme les hpitaux, les avions et les sites de dtonation. 2.3 INTERFRENCE DES RADIOFRQUENCES Partie 15 de la FCC 2.3.1 Cet appareil est conforme la Partie 15 de la rglementation de la FCC. Le fonctionnement est soumis aux deux conditions suivantes :

1. Cet appareil ne doit pas causer une interfrence nuisible; et 2. Cet appareil doit accepter toute interfrence reue, y compris une interfrence qui peut causer un fonctionnement non souhait. Industrie Canada 2.3.2 Le prsent appareil est conforme aux CNR d'Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorise aux deux conditions suivantes : (1) l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et (2) l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radiolectrique subi, mme si le brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre le fonctionnement. 2.4 CONSEILS DUTILISATION Lemplacement et ltat de lantenne sont importants pour lutilisation dune radio portative. Lutilisation de la radio dans des zones de faible lvation, sous des lignes lectriques ou des ponts, lintrieur dun vhicule ou dans un immeuble ossature mtallique, peut rduire la porte de lappareil de manire considrable. Les montagnes peuvent galement rduire la porte de lunit. Dans les zones o la transmission ou la rception est insatisfaisante, certaines amliorations peuvent tre obtenues en sassurant que lantenne est verticale. Se dplacer de quelques mtres dans une autre direction ou un emplacement plus lev peut galement amliorer les communications. Lutilisation dune antenne fixe lextrieur peut faciliter le fonctionnement dans un vhicule. Ltat de la pile est un autre facteur important dune utilisation sans tracas dune radio portative. Chargez toujours correctement la pile. Utilisation Efficace de la Radio 2.4.1 Gardez lantenne dans une position verticale pendant la rception ou la transmission dun message. 12 14221-1800-2010 Ne tenez PAS lantenne lorsque la radio est allume!

MISE EN GARDE 2.4.1.1 Entretien et Remplacement de lantenne Conservez TOUJOURS lappareil et son antenne au moins 1,5 cm (0,59 po) du corps, et au moins 2,5 cm

(1,0 po) du visage pendant la transmission, pour vous assurer de ne pas dpasser les exigences de conformit de la FCC en matire dexposition aux RF. Nutilisez pas la radio portative si son antenne est endommage ou absente. Une brlure lgre peut se produire au contact dune antenne endommage avec la peau. Remplacez antenne endommage. Lutilisation dune radio portative alors que lantenne est absente peut causer des blessures, endommager la rglementation de la FCC. la radio et pourrait enfreindre immdiatement une lantenne fournie ou une antenne Utilisez seulement approuve. Des antennes non autorises, des modifications ou des ajouts une antenne peuvent endommager la radio et enfreindre la rglementation de la FCC. MISE EN GARDE MISE EN GARDE AVERTISSEMENT 2.4.1.2 Appareils lectroniques Lnergie des RF provenant de radios portatives peut affecter certains appareils lectroniques. La majorit de lquipement lectronique moderne dans les voitures, les hpitaux, les maisons, etc. est blind contre lnergie des RF. Cependant, dans les zones o lon vous demande de fermer lquipement de radio bidirectionnelle, respectez toujours les rgles. En cas de doute, teignez-le!

AVERTISSEMENT 2.4.1.3 Avion 14221-1800-2010 13 teignez toujours une radio portative avant dembarquer bord dun avion!

lutilisez au sol quavec Ne lquipage. la permission de MISE EN GARDE NE lutilisez PAS durant le vol!

2.4.1.4 Dtonateurs lectriques Pour prvenir la dtonation accidentelle des dtonateurs lectriques, nutilisez PAS de radios bidirectionnelles moins de 305 m (1 000 pi) des oprations de dtonation. Respectez toujours les indications teindre les radios bidirectionnelles situes l o des dtonateurs lectriques sont utiliss. (Norme OSHA : 1926.900) MISE EN GARDE 2.4.1.5 Atmosphre Potentiellement Explosive Les zones ayant une atmosphre potentiellement explosive sont souvent, mais pas toujours, identifies clairement comme telles. Il peut sagir de zones dalimentation en carburant, comme les postes dessence, les installations de stockage ou de transfert de carburant ou de produits chimiques, ainsi que les zones dont lair contient des produits chimiques ou des particules, comme des grains, de la poussire ou des poudres mtalliques. Des tincelles dans de telles zones peuvent provoquer une explosion ou un incendie, causant ainsi des blessures ou mme la mort. teignez les radios bidirectionnelles dans toute zone ayant une atmosphre potentiellement explosive. Il est rare, mais pas impossible quune radio ou ses accessoires produisent des tincelles. MISE EN GARDE 3. OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES A complete list of Options and Accessories approved for use with the XL-

200P portable radio can be found online in the Operators Manual 14221-

1800-2000 at www.pspc.harris.co . Also reference the maintenance manual or Harris Products and Services Catalog for all available options and accessories, including those items that do not adversely affect the RF energy exposure. 14 14221-1800-2010 m Always use Harris authorized accessories (antennas, batteries, belt clips, speaker/mics, etc). Use of unauthorized accessories may cause the FCC Occupational/Controlled Exposure RF compliance requirements to be exceeded. Always use the correct options and accessories (battery, antenna, speaker/mic, etc.) for the radio. Immersion rated options must be used with an immersion rated radio. Intrinsically safe options must be used with intrinsically safe radios. WARNING CAUTION 4. BATTERY PACKS The XL-200P series portable radios use rechargeable, recyclable Nickel Metal Hydride (NiMH), Lithium-Polymer (Li-Poly), or Lithium-Ion (Li-Ion) battery packs. Please follow the directions below to maximize the useful life of each type of battery pack. Do not disassemble or modify Lithium battery packs. The Lithium battery packs are equipped with built-in safety and protection features. Should these features be disabled or tampered with in any way, the battery pack can leak electrolyte, overheat, emit smoke, burst, and/or ignite. If the battery pack is ruptured or is leaking electrolyte that results in skin or eye contact with the electrolyte, immediately flush the affected area with water. If the battery electrolyte gets in the eyes, flush with water for 15 minutes and consult a physician immediately. Always use Harris authorized chargers and conditioners. Use of unauthorized chargers and conditioners may void the warranty. WARNING WARNING CAUTION 4.1 CONDITIONING NIMH BATTERY PACKS Condition a new NiMH battery pack before putting into use. This also applies to rechargeable NiMH battery packs that have been stored for long periods

(weeks, months, or longer). Conditioning requires fully charging and fully discharging the battery pack three (3) times using the tri-chemistry charger. The first time the battery pack is put into the charger, this unit will condition Nickel-based battery packs by automatically charging and discharging

(cycling) the battery. Refer to the appropriate charger manual for details. 14221-1800-2010 15 Failure to properly condition NiMH battery packs before initial use will result in shortened performance by the battery. CAUTION 4.2 CONDITIONING LITHIUM BATTERY PACKS Lithium-based battery packs do not suffer from memory effect and therefore do not require conditioning. 4.3 STORING LI-ION BATTERY PACKS If a battery pack is expected to be idle for a month or more, it should be properly prepared. Li-Ion battery packs should not be stored fully charged. Before storing the battery pack, discharge it to 40% capacity. If the battery is not discharged prior to storage, its overall capacity may be reduced. Although all battery packs experience some capacity loss during storage, the shelf life for Li-Ion battery packs is about 3 months. However, note that any capacity drop which occurs during storage is permanent and cannot be reversed. Li-Ion battery packs should be purchased and used immediately. They should not be stock-piled without a rotating stock plan. 4.4 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION For more information regarding the proper care of portable radio battery packs or establishing a battery maintenance program, refer to ECR-7367 which may be ordered by calling toll free 1-800-368-3277 (international - 1-434-455-

6403) or via https://premier.pspc.harris.com/infocenter/. 4.5 BATTERY DISPOSAL CAUTION In no instance should a battery pack be incinerated. Disposing of a battery pack by burning will cause an explosion. RECHARGEABLE BATTERY PACK DISPOSAL The product you have purchased contains a rechargeable battery pack. The battery pack is recyclable. At the end of its useful life, under various state and local laws, it may be illegal to dispose of this battery pack into the municipal waste stream. Check with your local solid waste officials for details in your area for recycling options or proper disposal. Canadian and U.S. users may call Toll Free 1-800-8-BATTERY for information and/or procedures for returning rechargeable batteries in your locality. 16 14221-1800-2010 5. TECHNICAL ASSISTANCE The Technical Assistance Center's (TACs) resources are available to help with overall system operation, maintenance, upgrades and product support. TAC is your point of contact when answers are needed to technical questions. Product specialists, with detailed knowledge of product operation, maintenance, and repair, provide technical support via a toll-free (in North America) telephone number. Support is also available through mail, fax and e-mail. For more information about technical assistance services, contact your sales representative, or call the Technical Assistance Center directly at:

North America:

International:

Fax:

E-mail:

1-800-528-7711 1-434-385-2400 1-434-455-6712 PSPC_tac@harris.com 6. WARRANTY 1-800-368-3277 1-321-409-4393 PSPC_CustomerFocus@harris.com If any part of the system equipment is damaged on arrival, contact the shipper to conduct an inspection and prepare a damage report. Save the shipping container and all packing materials until the inspection and the damage report are completed. In addition, contact the Customer Care center to make arrangements for replacement equipment. Do not return any part of the shipment until you receive detailed instructions from a Harris representative. North America:

Phone Number:

Fax Number:

E-mail:

International:

Phone Number:

Fax Number:

E-mail:

Please register this product within 10 days of purchase. Registration validates the warranty coverage, and enables Harris to contact you in case of any safety notifications issued for this product. Registration can be made on-line at the Customer Care center webpage:

http://www.pspc.harris.com/Service/Customerservice.aspx. While on the webpage, please review the applicable battery and/or product warranty literature. 1-434-455-6403 1-321-409-4394 PSPC_InternationalCustomerFocus@harris.com 14221-1800-2010 17 Public Safety and Professional Communications 221 Jefferson Ridge Parkway | Lynchburg, VA USA 24501 www.pspc.harris.com | 1-800-528-7711

 

 

Rhein Tech Laboratories, Inc. 360 Herndon Parkway Suite 1400 Herndon, VA 20170 http://www.rheintech.com Appendix J: User Manual Please refer to the following pages for the Operators Manual and the Product Safety Manual. Client: Harris Corporation Model: XL200P IDs: OWDTR-0133-E/3636B-0133 Standards: FCC 15.247/IC RSS-210 Report #: 2015029DSS 46 of 50 Operators Manual 14221-1800-2000 Jun/15 XL-200P Full-Spectrum Multiband Radio 14221-1800-2000 REV.

-

DATE Jun/15 Initial release. MANUAL REVISION HISTORY REASON FOR CHANGE Harris Corporation, Public Safety and Professional Communications (PSPC) Business continually evaluates its technical publications for completeness, technical accuracy, and organization. You can assist in this process by submitting your comments and suggestions to the following:

Harris Corporation PSPC Business Technical Publications 221 Jefferson Ridge Parkway Lynchburg, VA 24501 fax your comments to: 1-434-455-6851 or e-mail us at: PSPC_TechPubs@harris.com ACKNOWLEDGEMENT This product was developed using GEOTRANS, a product of the National Geospatial Intelligence Agency and U.S. Army Engineering Research and Development Center. Use of this software does not indicate endorsement or approval of the product by the Secretary of Defense or the National Geospatial Intelligence Agency. This device made under license under one or more of the following US patents: 4,590,473; 4,636,791; 5,148,482; 5,185,796; 5,271,017;

5,377,229; 4,716,407; 4,972,460; 5,502,767; 5,146,697; 5,164,986; 5,185,795. The Advanced Multi-Band Excitation implementation 2 (AMBE+2) voice coding Technology embodied in this product is protected by intellectual property rights including patent rights, copyrights and trade secrets of Digital Voice Systems, Inc. This voice coding Technology is licensed solely for use within this Communications Equipment. The user of this Technology is explicitly prohibited from attempting to extract, remove, decompile, reverse engineer, or disassemble the Object Code, or in any other way convert the Object Code into a human-readable form. U.S. Patent Nos. #5,870,405, #5,826,222, #5,754,974, #5,701,390, #5,715,365, #5,649,050, #5,630,011,

#5,581,656, #5,517,511, #5,491,772, #5,247,579, #5,226,084 and #5,195,166. CREDITS Harris, assuredcommunications, Unity, VIDA, EDACS, NetworkFirst, and OpenSky are registered trademarks of Harris Corporation. Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc. Motorola is a registered trademark of Motorola, Inc. AMBE is a registered trademark and IMBE, AMBE+, and AMBE+2 are trademarks of Digital Voice Systems, Inc. Wi-Fi is a registered trademark of Wi-Fi Alliance. All brand and product names are trademarks, registered trademarks, or service marks of their respective holders. NOTICE!

The material contained herein is subject to U.S. export approval. No export or re-export is permitted without written approval from the U.S. Government. Rated: EAR99; in accordance with U.S. Dept. of Commerce regulations 15CFR774, Export Administration Regulations. Information and descriptions contained herein are the property of Harris Corporation. Such information and descriptions may not be copied or reproduced by any means, or disseminated or distributed without the express prior written permission of Harris Corporation, PSPC Business, 221 Jefferson Ridge Parkway, Lynchburg, VA 24501. Repairs to this equipment should be made only by an authorized service technician or facility designated by the supplier. Any repairs, alterations or substitutions of recommended parts made by the user to this equipment not approved by the manufacturer could void the user's authority to operate the equipment in addition to the manufacturer's warranty. This product conforms to the European Union WEEE Directive 2012/19/EU. Do not dispose of this product in a public landfill. Take it to a recycling center at the end of its life. This manual is published by Harris Corporation without any warranty. Improvements and changes to this manual necessitated by typographical errors, inaccuracies of current information, or improvements to programs and/or equipment, may be made by Harris Corporation at any time and without notice. Such changes will be incorporated into new editions of this manual. No part of this manual may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, including photocopying and recording, for any purpose, without the express written permission of Harris Corporation. Copyright 2015 Harris Corporation. 2 14221-1800-2000 TABLE OF CONTENTS 3. 2.4 2.3 1.3 2.1 2.2 1.1 1.2 Section Page 1. REGULATORY AND SAFETY INFORMATION ............................................................................. 7 SAFETY CONVENTIONS .......................................................................................................... 7 SAFETY TRAINING INFORMATION ...................................................................................... 7 1.2.1 RF Exposure Guidelines .................................................................................................. 8 1.2.2 Electromagnetic Interference/Compatibility .................................................................... 9 REGULATORY APPROVALS ................................................................................................... 9 1.3.1 Part 15 .............................................................................................................................. 9 1.3.2 Industry Canada ............................................................................................................... 9 1.4 OPERATING TIPS ...................................................................................................................... 9 1.4.1 Efficient Radio Operation ................................................................................................ 9 2. RENSEIGNEMENTS SUR LA RGLEMENTATION ET SCURIT ....................................... 11 CONVENTIONS SUR LES SYMBOLES DE SCURIT ...................................................... 11 RENSEIGNEMENTS SUR LA FORMATION SUR LA SCURIT ...................................... 11 2.2.1 Directives sur lexposition aux RF ................................................................................ 12 2.2.2 Interfrence/Compatibilit lectromagntique .............................................................. 13 INTERFRENCE DES RADIOFRQUENCES ....................................................................... 13 2.3.1 Partie 15 de la FCC ........................................................................................................ 13 2.3.2 Industrie Canada ............................................................................................................ 13 CONSEILS DUTILISATION ................................................................................................... 13 2.4.1 Utilisation Efficace de la Radio ..................................................................................... 13 INTRODUCTION ................................................................................................................................ 16 3.1 DESCRIPTION .......................................................................................................................... 16 STORAGE GUIDELINES ......................................................................................................... 16 3.2 BASIC SETUP ........................................................................................................................... 17 3.3 3.3.1 Assemble the Radio ....................................................................................................... 17 3.3.2 Removing the Battery .................................................................................................... 18 3.3.3 Removing the Optional Belt Clip .................................................................................. 18 CLEANING ................................................................................................................................ 19 3.4 3.5 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES .............................................................................................. 20 4. BASIC OPERATION ........................................................................................................................... 22 4.1 XL-200P CONTROLS ............................................................................................................... 22 SOFT DTMF KEYPAD ............................................................................................................. 24 4.2 4.3 BEFORE FIRST USE ................................................................................................................. 24 POWER ON AND SET VOLUME ............................................................................................ 25 4.4 RADIO DISPLAYS .................................................................................................................... 25 4.5 4.5.1 Top Display ................................................................................................................... 25 4.5.2 Front Display ................................................................................................................. 25 4.6 STATUS MESSAGES ............................................................................................................... 27 4.7 MENU ........................................................................................................................................ 27 4.8 PREDEFINED MENU LAYOUTS............................................................................................ 30 4.9 ALERT TONES.......................................................................................................................... 31 4.10 SELECT ZONE/SYSTEM ......................................................................................................... 32 4.11 SELECT GROUP/CHANNEL AND BANK ............................................................................. 33 4.12 LOCK/UNLOCK KEYPAD....................................................................................................... 33 4.13 GROUP CALLS ......................................................................................................................... 34 4.13.1 Change Talkgroup ......................................................................................................... 34 4.13.2 Receive a Group Call ..................................................................................................... 34 3 14221-1800-2000 4.14 INDIVIDUAL CALLS ............................................................................................................... 34 4.14.1 Transmit an Individual Call ........................................................................................... 34 4.14.2 Receiving an Individual Call ......................................................................................... 35 4.15 PROFILES .................................................................................................................................. 35 4.16 NOISE CANCELLATION ......................................................................................................... 36 4.16.1 Enable Noise Cancellation ............................................................................................. 36 4.16.2 Using Noise Cancellation .............................................................................................. 37 4.16.3 The Effect of Distance from the Microphone ................................................................ 37 4.16.4 Primary versus Secondary Microphone ......................................................................... 37 4.16.5 When using an SCBA Mask .......................................................................................... 37 4.17 PTT OPTIONS ........................................................................................................................... 38 4.18 VOICE ANNUNCIATION ........................................................................................................ 38 4.19 ENABLE/DISABLE ENCRYPTION ........................................................................................ 39 4.20 TRANSMIT ENABLE/DISABLE ............................................................................................. 39 4.21 CHANNEL GUARD (ANALOG CONVENTIONAL ONLY) ................................................. 40 4.22 USE TALKAROUND TO BYPASS REPEATER (ANALOG AND P25 CONVENTIONAL ONLY) ........................................................................................................................................ 41 4.23 TYPE 99 OPERATION .............................................................................................................. 42 4.23.1 Enable/Disable Type 99 ................................................................................................. 42 4.23.2 Disable After PTT .......................................................................................................... 42 4.23.3 Auto Reset ..................................................................................................................... 42 4.24 CALL ALERT (PAGE) .............................................................................................................. 43 4.24.1 Send Alert ...................................................................................................................... 43 4.24.2 Receive Alert ................................................................................................................. 43 4.25 DTMF ......................................................................................................................................... 43 4.26 AUDIO PLAYBACK ................................................................................................................. 43 4.27 START SCAN ............................................................................................................................ 44 4.28 STOP SCAN ............................................................................................................................... 45 4.29 MONITOR AND SQUELCH TYPES (CONVENTIONAL ONLY) ........................................ 46 4.30 NUISANCE DELETE ................................................................................................................ 46 4.31 EMERGENCY OPERATION .................................................................................................... 47 4.31.1 Declaring an Emergency Call ........................................................................................ 47 4.31.2 Receiving an Emergency Call ....................................................................................... 48 4.31.3 Stealth Emergency ......................................................................................................... 48 4.32 MDC-1200 (ANALOG CONVENTIONAL ONLY) ................................................................. 48 4.32.1 Normal PTT Operation .................................................................................................. 48 4.32.2 MDC PTT ID Receive Handling ................................................................................... 48 4.32.3 Emergency Declaration ................................................................................................. 49 5. ADVANCED OPERATIONS .............................................................................................................. 50 5.1 VIEW/CHANGE PERSONALITIES ......................................................................................... 50 5.1.1 View Personalities ......................................................................................................... 50 5.1.2 Change Active Personality ............................................................................................ 50 5.2 SITUATIONAL AWARENESS (SA) P25 CONVENTIONAL ONLY ................................. 51 5.3 USER-DEFINED ZONES/SYSTEMS ....................................................................................... 52 5.3.1 Command Tactical Zone ................................................................................................ 52 5.3.2 Mixed System Zone ....................................................................................................... 53 5.4 CH INFO MENU ........................................................................................................................ 54 5.5 AUDIO SETTINGS .................................................................................................................... 54 5.6 DISPLAY SETTINGS ................................................................................................................ 55 5.7 GPS SETTINGS ......................................................................................................................... 56 4 14221-1800-2000 5.8 POSITION INFO ........................................................................................................................ 56 5.9 WI-FI .......................................................................................................................................... 57 5.10 BLUETOOTH ............................................................................................................................ 57 5.10.1 Enable Bluetooth ........................................................................................................... 57 5.10.2 Pair Devices ................................................................................................................... 58 5.11 CLOCK SETTINGS ................................................................................................................... 59 5.12 BATTERY SETTINGS .............................................................................................................. 59 5.13 SELECT LANGUAGE .............................................................................................................. 60 5.14 SET UP SCAN ........................................................................................................................... 60 5.14.1 Default, Priority 1, and Priority 2 Channels .................................................................. 60 5.14.2 Trunked/Conventional Scanning ................................................................................... 61 5.14.3 Vote Scan (Analog and P25 Conventional Only) .......................................................... 61 5.14.4 Edit Scan List ................................................................................................................. 62 5.14.5 Set or Remove Priority 1 and Priority 2 Channels ......................................................... 62 5.14.6 Custom Scan Lists ......................................................................................................... 63 5.14.7 Wide Area System Scan (P25 Trunked Only) ............................................................... 64 5.15 RADIO STATUS........................................................................................................................ 64 5.16 RADIO MESSAGE .................................................................................................................... 65 5.17 RADIO TEXTLINK ................................................................................................................... 65 5.17.1 Radio TextLink Messages ............................................................................................. 66 5.17.2 Radio TextLink Forms ................................................................................................... 66 5.17.3 View Received Messages .............................................................................................. 67 5.18 FAULTS/ALERTS ..................................................................................................................... 67 5.19 TONE ENCODE ........................................................................................................................ 68 5.20 ENCRYPTION ........................................................................................................................... 69 5.20.1 Create and Load Keys .................................................................................................... 69 5.20.2 Zeroize Keys from Radio ............................................................................................... 69 5.20.3 Protected Keys ............................................................................................................... 69 5.20.4 Global Encryption .......................................................................................................... 70 5.20.5 Select Keyset ................................................................................................................. 70 5.20.6 View Key List ................................................................................................................ 70 5.20.7 OTAR Configuration ..................................................................................................... 71 6. PROGRAMMING ................................................................................................................................ 72 PROGRAMMING VIA RPM2 .................................................................................................. 72 6.1 6.2 EDIT CHANNEL (ANALOG AND P25 CONVENTIONAL ONLY) ..................................... 72 6.3 OTAP .......................................................................................................................................... 74 PROGRAMMABLE BUTTONS AND SWITCHES ................................................................. 74 6.4 6.4.1 Programmable Buttons .................................................................................................. 74 6.4.2 Programmable A/B (/O) Switch ................................................................................. 75 6.4.3 Programmable A/B/C/D Switch .................................................................................... 76 PROGRAMMABLE ICONS ...................................................................................................... 77 6.5.1 Top display .................................................................................................................... 77 6.5.2 Front display .................................................................................................................. 78 7. REFERENCE ........................................................................................................................................ 79 7.1 MARINE FREQUENCIES ........................................................................................................ 79 7.2 NARROWBANDING ................................................................................................................ 84 8. GLOSSARY .......................................................................................................................................... 85 9. BASIC TROUBLESHOOTING .......................................................................................................... 88 ERROR MESSAGES ................................................................................................................. 88 6.5 9.1 5 14221-1800-2000 9.2 OTAR ERRORS/INFORMATION ............................................................................................ 89 10. TECHNICAL ASSISTANCE .............................................................................................................. 90 11. WARRANTY ........................................................................................................................................ 91 LIST OF FIGURES Page Figure 3-1: Radio Assembly .......................................................................................................................... 17 Figure 3-2: Remove the Battery ..................................................................................................................... 18 Figure 3-3: Remove Belt Clip ........................................................................................................................ 18 Figure 4-1: XL-200P Controls ....................................................................................................................... 22 Figure 4-2: Using the Soft DTMF Keypad .................................................................................................... 24 Figure 4-3: Top Display ................................................................................................................................. 25 Figure 4-4: Sample Idle Front Display........................................................................................................... 25 Figure 4-5: Using Noise Cancellation ............................................................................................................ 37 Figure 5-1: Enabling Wi-Fi ............................................................................................................................ 57 Figure 5-2: Vote Scan Enabled ...................................................................................................................... 61 Figure 11-1: RPM2 Network Configuration Screen ...................................................................................... 93 LIST OF TABLES Page Table 1-1: RF Exposure Compliance Testing Distances ................................................................................. 8 Tableau 2-1 : Distances de test de conformit des expositions aux RF ......................................................... 12 Table 3-1: Options and Accessories ............................................................................................................... 20 Table 4-1: XL-200P Controls, Indicators, and Connectors ............................................................................ 22 Table 4-2: Radio Icons ................................................................................................................................... 26 Table 4-3: Status Messages ............................................................................................................................ 27 Table 4-4: Menu Navigation ......................................................................................................................... 27 Table 4-5: Predefined Menu Layouts ............................................................................................................. 30 Table 4-6: Alert Tones ................................................................................................................................... 31 Table 6-1: Valid Frequencies ......................................................................................................................... 73 Table 6-2: Programmable Button Options ..................................................................................................... 74 Table 6-3: Programmable /O Switch Options ............................................................................................. 75 Table 6-4: Single-Instance Features ............................................................................................................... 76 Table 6-5: Indexed Features ........................................................................................................................... 77 Table 7-1: Marine Frequencies ...................................................................................................................... 79 6 14221-1800-2000 1. REGULATORY AND SAFETY INFORMATION 1.1 SAFETY CONVENTIONS The following conventions are used throughout this manual to alert the user to general safety precautions that must be observed during all phases of operation, service, and repair of this product. Failure to comply with these precautions or with specific warning elsewhere in this manual violates safety standards of design, manufacture, and intended use of the product. Harris assumes no liability for the customers failure to comply with these standards. The WARNING symbol calls attention to a procedure, practice, or the like, which, if not correctly performed or adhered to, could result in personal injury. Do not proceed beyond a WARNING symbol until the conditions identified are fully understood or met. The CAUTION symbol calls attention to an operating procedure, practice, or the like, which, if not performed correctly or adhered to, could result in damage to the equipment or severely degrade the equipment performance. The NOTE symbol calls attention to supplemental information, which may improve system performance or clarify a process or procedure. WARNING CAUTION NOTE 1.2 SAFETY TRAINING INFORMATION The Harris XL-200P portable radio generates RF electromagnetic energy during transmit mode. This radio is designed for and classified as Occupational Use Only, meaning it must be used only during the course of employment by individuals aware of the hazards and the ways to minimize such hazards. This radio is NOT intended for use by the General Population in an uncontrolled environment. WARNING The XL-200P portable radio has been tested and complies with the FCC RF exposure limits for Occupational Use Only. In addition, this Harris radio complies with the following Standards and Guidelines with regard to RF energy and electromagnetic energy levels and evaluation of such levels for exposure to humans:

FCC OET Bulletin 65 Edition 97-01 Supplement C, Evaluating Compliance with FCC Guidelines for Human Exposure to Radio Frequency Electromagnetic Fields. American National Standards Institute (C95.1 1992), IEEE Standard for Safety Levels with Respect to Human Exposure to Radio Frequency Electromagnetic Fields, 3 kHz to 300 GHz. American National Standards Institute (C95.3 1992), IEEE Recommended Practice for the Measurement of Potentially Hazardous Electromagnetic Fields RF and Microwave. IC Standard RSS-102, Issue 4, 2010: Spectrum Management and Telecommunications Radio Standards Specification. Radiofrequency Exposure Compliance of Radiocommunication Apparatus

(All Frequency Bands). 7 14221-1800-2000 1.2.1 RF Exposure Guidelines To ensure that exposure to RF electromagnetic energy is within the FCC allowable limits for occupational use, always adhere to the following guidelines:

CAUTION DO NOT operate the radio without a proper antenna attached, as this may damage the radio and may also cause the FCC RF exposure limits to be exceeded. A proper antenna is the antenna supplied with this radio by Harris or an antenna specifically authorized by Harris for use with this radio. (Refer to Table 3-1.) DO NOT transmit for more than 50% of total radio use time (50% duty cycle). Transmitting more than 50% of the time can cause FCC RF exposure compliance requirements to be exceeded. The radio is transmitting when the TX indicator appears in the display. The radio will transmit by pressing the PTT (Push-To-Talk) button. ALWAYS transmit using low power when possible. In addition to conserving battery charge, low power can reduce RF exposure. ALWAYS use Harris authorized accessories (antennas, batteries, belt clips, speaker/mics, etc). Use of unauthorized accessories may cause the FCC Occupational/Controlled Exposure RF compliance requirements to be exceeded. (Refer to Table 1-1.) As noted in Table 1-1, ALWAYS keep the housing of the transmitter AT LEAST 0.47 inches (1.2 cm) from the body and at least 0.98 in (2.5 cm) from the face when transmitting to ensure FCC RF exposure compliance requirements are not exceeded. However, to provide the best sound quality to the recipients of your transmission, Harris recommends you hold the microphone at least 2 in (5 cm) from mouth, and slightly off to one side. Table 1-1: RF Exposure Compliance Testing Distances RADIO FREQUENCY VHF

(136 - 174 MHz) UHF

(378 - 522 MHz) 700/800 MHz

(768 - 776 MHz)

(798 - 806 MHz)

(806 - 816 MHz)

(851 - 861 MHz) 2400 MHz

(2412 - 2472 MHz) 5 GHz

(5.18 - 5.825 GHz) TESTED DISTANCES

(worst case scenario) Body1 0.47 in (1.2 cm) 0.47 in (1.2 cm) Face 0.98 in (2.5 cm) 0.98 in (2.5 cm) 0.47 in (1.2 cm) 0.98 in (2.5 cm) 0.47 in (1.2 cm) 0.47 in (1.2 cm) 0.98 in (2.5 cm) 0.98 in (2.5 cm) 1 This is worst case based on the thinnest body mount accessory (belt clip). 8 14221-1800-2000 The information in this section provides the information needed to make the user aware of RF exposure, and what to do to assure that this radio operates within the FCC RF exposure limits. 1.2.2 Electromagnetic Interference/Compatibility During transmissions, this Harris radio generates RF energy that can possibly cause interference with other devices or systems. To avoid such interference, turn off the radio in areas where signs are posted to do so. DO NOT operate the transmitter in areas that are sensitive to electromagnetic radiation such as hospitals, aircraft, and blasting sites. 1.3 REGULATORY APPROVALS 1.3.1 Part 15 This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and 2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Industry Canada 1.3.2 This device complies with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. 1.4 OPERATING TIPS Antenna location and condition are important when operating a portable radio. Operating the radio in low lying areas or terrain, under power lines or bridges, inside of a vehicle, or in a metal framed building can severely reduce the range of the unit. Mountains can also reduce the range of the unit. In areas where transmission or reception is poor, some improvement may be obtained by ensuring that the antenna is vertical. Moving a few yards in another direction or moving to a higher elevation may also improve communications. Vehicular operation can be aided with the use of an externally mounted antenna. Battery condition is another important factor in the trouble free operation of a portable radio. Always properly charge the battery. 1.4.1 Efficient Radio Operation Keep the antenna in a vertical position when receiving or transmitting a message. Do NOT hold onto the antenna when the radio is powered on!

WARNING 9 14221-1800-2000 1.4.1.1 Antenna Care and Replacement Do not use the portable radio with a damaged or missing antenna. A minor burn may result if a damaged antenna comes into contact with the skin. Replace a damaged antenna immediately. Operating a portable radio with the antenna missing could cause personal injury, damage the radio, and may violate FCC regulations. Use only the supplied or approved antenna. Unauthorized antennas, modifications, or attachments could cause damage to the radio unit and may violate FCC regulations. (Refer to Table 3-1.) WARNING CAUTION 1.4.1.2 Electronic Devices RF energy from portable radios may affect some electronic equipment. Most modern electronic equipment in cars, hospitals, homes, etc. is shielded from RF energy. However, in areas in which you are instructed to turn off two-way radio equipment, always observe the rules. If in doubt, turn it off!

CAUTION 1.4.1.3 Aircraft Always turn off a portable radio before boarding any aircraft!

Use it on the ground only with crew permission. DO NOT use while in-flight!!

WARNING 1.4.1.4 Electric Blasting Caps To prevent accidental detonation of electric blasting caps, DO NOT use two-way radios within 1000 feet of blasting operations. Always obey the "Turn Off Two-Way Radios" signs posted where electric blasting caps are being used. (OSHA Standard:

1926.900) WARNING 1.4.1.5 Potentially Explosive Atmospheres Areas with potentially explosive atmospheres are often, but not always, clearly marked. These may be fuelling areas, such as gas stations, fuel or chemical transfer or storage facilities, and areas where the air contains chemicals or particles, such as grain, dust, or metal powders. Sparks in such areas could cause an explosion or fire resulting in bodily injury or even death. Turn off two-way radios when in any area with a potentially explosive atmosphere. It is rare, but not impossible that a radio or its accessories could generate sparks. WARNING 10 14221-1800-2000 2. RENSEIGNEMENTS SUR LA RGLEMENTATION ET SCURIT 2.1 CONVENTIONS SUR LES SYMBOLES DE SCURIT Les conventions suivantes sont utilises dans le prsent manuel pour avertir lutilisateur des prcautions gnrales de scurit qui doivent tre observes pendant toutes les phases dopration, dentretien et de rparation de ce produit. Le non-respect de ces prcautions ou davertissements prciss ailleurs enfreint les normes de scurit de la conception, de la fabrication et de lutilisation prvue du produit. Harris nassume aucune responsabilit pour le non-respect de ces normes par le client. Le symbole MISE EN GARDE attire lattention sur une procdure ou une pratique qui, si elle nest pas correctement effectue ou observe, pourrait entraner une blessure personnelle. Ne pas poursuivre au-del dun symbole de MISE EN GARDE avant que les conditions identifies soient compltement comprises ou satisfaites. Le symbole AVERTISSEMENT attire lattention sur une procdure ou une pratique oprationnelle qui, si elle nest pas correctement effectue ou observe, pourrait entraner un bris dquipement ou une importante baisse de rendement de lquipement. Le symbole REMARQUE attire lattention sur des renseignements supplmentaires qui peuvent amliorer le rendement du systme ou clarifier un processus ou une procdure. MISE EN GARDE AVERTISSEMENT REMARQUE 2.2 RENSEIGNEMENTS SUR LA FORMATION SUR LA SCURIT La radio portative Harris XL-200P produit de lnergie lectromagntique des RF lorsquen mode de transmission. Cette radio est conue et classe pour une Utilisation professionnelle seulement , ce qui signifie quelle ne doit tre utilise que dans le cadre dun emploi par des individus conscients des risques et des moyens de limiter ceux-ci. Cette radio NEST PAS conue pour une utilisation par la Population gnrale dans un environnement non contrl. MISE EN GARDE La radio portative XL-200P a t teste et est conforme aux limites dexposition aux RF de la FCC pour une Utilisation professionnelle seulement . De plus, cette radio Harris est conforme aux normes et directives suivantes quant lnergie des RF et aux niveaux dnergie lectromagntique, ainsi qu lvaluation de ces niveaux pour lexposition aux humains :

Bulletin 65 du OET de la FCC, dition 97-01, supplment C, portant sur lvaluation de la conformit aux directives de la FCC quant lexposition humaine aux champs lectromagntiques des radiofrquences. American National Standards Institute (C95.1 1992), norme de lIEEE sur les niveaux scuritaires dexposition humaine aux champs lectromagntiques des radiofrquences, 3 kHz 300 GHz. American National Standards Institute (C95.3 1992), pratique recommande par lIEEE pour la mesure des champs lectromagntiques potentiellement dangereux RF et micro-ondes. 11 14221-1800-2000 2.2.1 Directives sur lexposition aux RF Pour sassurer que lexposition lnergie lectromagntique des RF se situe dans les limites acceptables de la FCC pour lutilisation professionnelle, respectez toujours les directives suivantes :

AVERTISSEMENT Nutilisez PAS la radio sans quune antenne approprie y soit connecte, car ceci peut endommager la radio et galement causer un dpassement des limites dexposition aux RF de la FCC. Une antenne approprie est celle fournie par Harris avec cette radio, ou une antenne spcifiquement autorise par Harris pour tre utilise avec cette radio. (Reportez-vous Tableau 2-1.) Ne transmettez PAS pendant plus de 50 % de la dure dutilisation totale de la radio ( cycle de service de 50 % ). La transmission pendant plus de 50 % du temps peut causer un dpassement des exigences de conformit de la FCC en matire dexposition aux RF. La radio transmet lorsque lindicateur TX apparat sur laffichage. La radio transmet lorsquon appuie sur le bouton PTT

(bouton de microphone). Transmettez TOUJOURS en basse puissance lorsque possible. En plus de prserver la charge de la pile, une faible puissance rduit lexposition aux RF. Utilisez TOUJOURS des accessoires autoriss Harris (antennes, piles, pinces de ceinture, haut-

parleurs/micros, etc.). Lutilisation daccessoires non autoriss peut entraner un dpassement des exigences de conformit pour une exposition aux RF professionnelle ou contrle de la FCC.

(Reportez-vous Table 3-1.) Tel quindiqu dans Tableau 2-1, conservez TOUJOURS lappareil et son antenne AU MOINS 1,2 cm du corps, et au moins 2,5 cm du visage pendant la transmission, pour vous assurer de ne pas dpasser les exigences de conformit de la FCC en matire dexposition aux RF. Cependant, pour offrir la meilleure qualit sonore aux auditeurs de votre transmission, Harris recommande de tenir le microphone au moins 5 cm (2 po) de votre bouche et lgrement dplac sur un ct. Tableau 2-1 : Distances de test de conformit des expositions aux RF RADIOFRQUENCES VHF

(136 - 174 MHz) UHF

(378 - 522 MHz) 700/800 MHz

(768 - 776 MHz)

(798 - 806 MHz)

(806 - 816 MHz)

(851 - 861 MHz) 2400 MHz

(2412 - 2472 MHz) 5 GHz DISTANCES TESTES

(pire des scnarios) Corps2 1,2 cm 1,2 cm 1,2 cm 1,2 cm Visage 2,5 cm 2,5 cm 2,5 cm 2,5 cm 2,5 cm

(5.18 - 5.825 GHz) 2 Ce est le pire des cas base sur le corps plus mince monter accessoire (clip ceinture). 1,2 cm 12 14221-1800-2000 Dans cette section figurent les renseignements ncessaires pour sensibiliser lutilisateur lexposition aux RF et sur ce quil faut faire pour sassurer que cette radio fonctionne dans les limites dexposition aux RF de la FCC. 2.2.2 Interfrence/Compatibilit lectromagntique Pendant les transmissions, cette radio Harris produit de lnergie des RF qui peut causer de linterfrence avec dautres appareils ou systmes. Pour viter de telles interfrences, fermez la radio dans les zones o il est indiqu de le faire. Nutilisez PAS le transmetteur dans des zones sensibles aux radiations lectromagntiques, comme les hpitaux, les avions et les sites de dtonation. 2.3 Partie 15 de la FCC INTERFRENCE DES RADIOFRQUENCES 2.3.1 Cet appareil est conforme la Partie 15 de la rglementation de la FCC. Le fonctionnement est soumis aux deux conditions suivantes :

1. Cet appareil ne doit pas causer une interfrence nuisible; et 2. Cet appareil doit accepter toute interfrence reue, y compris une interfrence qui peut causer un fonctionnement non souhait. Industrie Canada 2.3.2 Le prsent appareil est conforme aux CNR d'Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorise aux deux conditions suivantes : (1) l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et (2) l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radiolectrique subi, mme si le brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre le fonctionnement. 2.4 CONSEILS DUTILISATION Lemplacement et ltat de lantenne sont importants pour lutilisation dune radio portative. Lutilisation de la radio dans des zones de faible lvation, sous des lignes lectriques ou des ponts, lintrieur dun vhicule ou dans un immeuble ossature mtallique, peut rduire la porte de lappareil de manire considrable. Les montagnes peuvent galement rduire la porte de lunit. Dans les zones o la transmission ou la rception est insatisfaisante, certaines amliorations peuvent tre obtenues en sassurant que lantenne est verticale. Se dplacer de quelques mtres dans une autre direction ou un emplacement plus lev peut galement amliorer les communications. Lutilisation dune antenne fixe lextrieur peut faciliter le fonctionnement dans un vhicule. Ltat de la pile est un autre facteur important dune utilisation sans tracas dune radio portative. Chargez toujours correctement la pile. 2.4.1 Utilisation Efficace de la Radio Gardez lantenne dans une position verticale pendant la rception ou la transmission dun message. Ne tenez PAS lantenne lorsque la radio est allume!

MISE EN GARDE 13 14221-1800-2000 2.4.1.1 Entretien Et Remplacement De Lantenne Nutilisez pas la radio portative si son antenne est endommage ou absente. Une brlure lgre peut se produire au contact dune antenne endommage avec la peau. Remplacez immdiatement une antenne endommage. Lutilisation dune radio portative alors que lantenne est absente peut causer des blessures, endommager la radio et pourrait enfreindre la rglementation de la FCC. Utilisez seulement lantenne fournie ou une antenne approuve. Des antennes non autorises, des modifications ou des ajouts une antenne peuvent endommager la radio et enfreindre la rglementation de la FCC. (Reportez-vous Table 3-1.) MISE EN GARDE AVERTISSEMENT 2.4.1.2 Appareils lectroniques Lnergie des RF provenant de radios portatives peut affecter certains appareils lectroniques. La majorit de lquipement lectronique moderne dans les voitures, les hpitaux, les maisons, etc. est blind contre lnergie des RF. Cependant, dans les zones o lon vous demande de fermer lquipement de radio bidirectionnelle, respectez toujours les rgles. En cas de doute, teignez-le!

AVERTISSEMENT 2.4.1.3 Avion teignez toujours une radio portative avant dembarquer bord dun avion!

Ne lutilisez au sol quavec la permission de lquipage. NE lutilisez PAS durant le vol!

MISE EN GARDE 2.4.1.4 Dtonateurs lectriques Pour prvenir la dtonation accidentelle des dtonateurs lectriques, nutilisez PAS de radios bidirectionnelles moins de 305 m (1 000 pi) des oprations de dtonation. Respectez toujours les indications teindre les radios bidirectionnelles situes l o des dtonateurs lectriques sont utiliss. (Norme OSHA : 1926.900) MISE EN GARDE 14 14221-1800-2000 2.4.1.5 Atmosphre Potentiellement Explosive Les zones ayant une atmosphre potentiellement explosive sont souvent, mais pas toujours, identifies clairement comme telles. Il peut sagir de zones dalimentation en carburant, comme les postes dessence, les installations de stockage ou de transfert de carburant ou de produits chimiques, ainsi que les zones dont lair contient des produits chimiques ou des particules, comme des grains, de la poussire ou des poudres mtalliques. Des tincelles dans de telles zones peuvent provoquer une explosion ou un incendie, causant ainsi des blessures ou mme la mort. teignez les radios bidirectionnelles dans toute zone ayant une atmosphre potentiellement explosive. Il est rare, mais pas impossible quune radio ou ses accessoires produisent des tincelles. MISE EN GARDE 15 14221-1800-2000 3. 3.1 DESCRIPTION INTRODUCTION The XL-200P provides the advanced connectivity that first responders require while addressing evolving voice and data communications. The XL-200P supports VHF, UHF, and 700/800 MHz, allowing voice and data communications across agencies using multiple frequencies and systems. The XL-200P delivers easy-to-use tools in an extremely rugged radio that operates under the most adverse conditions. The XL-

200P meets MIL-STD-810G for durability and is certified to more stringent MIL-STD parameters for contamination by fluids and explosive atmospheres. The XL-200P is available in both Full and Partial keypad models in black and high-visibility yellow. Standard features found on the XL-200P include:

Extremely Rugged exceeds the standards of other radios on the market. Multiband Operation supports any combination of VHF, UHF, and 700/800 MHz frequencies. Also allows different bands to be enabled for selected users. Single-key DES Encryption provides basic secure communications without having to buy the complete encryption option. Instant Recall of Received Audio allows user to replay the last transmission received to avoid unnecessary repetition. Active Noise Cancellation with three internal microphones to transmit intelligible audio from users in loud environments. Built-in GPS for location reporting and rapid response for emergencies. Bluetooth for wireless interface to selected accessories and programming. Wi-Fi Connectivity permits simple and easy radio software and personality updates. Covert Mode allows users to quickly configure the radio for operation in a covert environment. Fully Programmable Keypad each key can be programmed to a variety of functions. 4 position switch provides added configuration flexibility. Unique User Interface tools specially designed by first responders make radio operation simple and intuitive. An easy-to-read multi-color front display and a monochromatic top display with optional colored backlighting enhance communications for improved user safety. For optional accessories, refer to Table 3-1. Additional accessories may have been added since publication of this manual; contact Harris for more information. 3.2 STORAGE GUIDELINES Store your XL-200P and batteries in a clean, cool (not exceeding 86 F [+30 C]), dry, and ventilated storage area. 16 14221-1800-2000 3.3 BASIC SETUP 3.3.1 Assemble the Radio Only use a Harris charger approved for the battery chemistry. Injury could occur from improper charger use. WARNING CAUTION Do not over-tighten the antenna as damage could result. 1. Make sure batteries are charged per the manual supplied with the charger. 2. To attach optional belt clip, remove the existing tab from the back of the radio above the battery compartment. Slide the belt clip into the groove. 3. Lift clip, if installed, and slide top of battery into top of battery compartment at the rear of the radio. 4. Press down on bottom side of battery until it snaps into place. Figure 3-1: Radio Assembly 17 14221-1800-2000 3.3.2 Removing the Battery To remove, press and hold the two tabs at the bottom of the battery and then pull battery up and out of the radio. Figure 3-2: Remove the Battery 3.3.3 Removing the Optional Belt Clip Remove the battery before removing the belt clip. To remove the belt clip, press and hold the tab towards the top of the battery compartment and slide the belt clip out of the groove in the back of the radio. Figure 3-3: Remove Belt Clip 18 3.4 CLEANING 14221-1800-2000 Keep the exterior of the radio, battery, antenna, and radio accessories clean. Periodically clean using the following procedures:

1. To remove dust and dirt, clean using damp clean cloth (warm water and mild detergent soap). 2. Follow by wiping with damp (warm water) clean cloth. Wipe dry with clean cloth. 3. Remove the battery and wipe the battery and radio contacts using a soft dry cloth to remove dirt or grease. This will ensure efficient power transfer from the battery to the radio. 4. Remove any accessories and clean the accessories Universal Device Connector (UDC) contacts using a clean dry cloth. When the UDC is not in use, cover the connector with the protective dust cap to prevent the build-up of dust or water particles. 5. If the radio is used in a harsh environment (such as driving rain, salt fog, etc.), it may be necessary to periodically dry and clean the battery and radio contacts with a soft dry cloth or soft-bristle non-

metallic brush. For more rigorous cleaning, use the following procedure:

Do not use chemical cleaners, spray, or petroleum-based products. They may damage the radio housing. We recommend using Chemtronics Electro-Wash PR (ES-1603) or equivalent. CAUTION 1. Apply the cleaning solution to a clean damp cloth and clean the radio. Do not spray cleaning solution directly on radio. To clean the radio in the speaker and microphone areas, carefully wipe these areas but prevent the cleaning solution from entering the speaker or microphone openings. NOTE 2. Wipe off the radio with clean damp cloth using mild warm soapy water. 3. Follow up by wiping off the radio with clean damp cloth using warm water only. 4. Wipe dry with clean cloth. 19 14221-1800-2000 3.5 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES Only use Harris approved accessories. Refer to Harris Product and Services catalog for the complete list of options and accessories available. Contact Harris for requirements not contained in this list:

Always use the correct options and accessories (battery, antenna, speaker/mic, etc.) for the radio. Immersion rated options must be used with an immersion rated radio. Refer to Table 3-1. CAUTION Table 3-1: Options and Accessories DESCRIPTION ANTENNAS Antenna, 146-162 MHz, Helical Antenna, 764-870MHZ, Flex End-Fed Gain Antenna, 764-870MHz, 1/4 Wave Whip Antenna, Full Spectrum Antenna, Whip Wideband 378-520 MHz, 762-870 MHz Antenna, 764-870 MHz, 1/4 Wave Whip Antenna, Half Wave Whip 700/800 MHz BATTERIES/CHARGERS Battery, Lithium, Standard Capacity Charger, Single Bay Charger, Multi Bay Charger, Vehicular AUDIO ACCESSORIES Speaker Microphone Speaker Microphone, Emergency Button Speaker Microphone, Wireless, Bluetooth Speaker Microphone, Premium, Fire, Noise Cancelling, Hirose Microphone, Palm, 2-Wire, Black Microphone, Palm, 2-Wire, Beige Microphone, Mini-Lapel, 3-Wire, Black Microphone, Mini-Lapel, 3-Wire, Beige Earphone Kit, Black Earphone Kit, Beige Headset, In-Ear, Boom Mic, In-Line PTT Headset, LTWT, OTH, Single Ear, In-Line PTT Headset, LTWT, BTH, Dual Ear, In-Line PTT Headset, LTWT, BTH, Dual Ear, Pig Tail PTT Headset, LTWT, BTH, Dual In-Ear, In-Line PTT Headset, LTWT, BTH, Dual In-Ear, Pig Tail PTT Headset, Heavy Duty, BTH, w/PTT Headset, Heavy Duty, OTH, w/PTT Headset, BTH Boom Mic, Earpiece, w/PTT Headset, Tactical, Boom Mic, Earpiece, w/PTT Skull Mic, w/Body PTT, Earcup Throat Mic, w/Acoustic Tube, Body PTT Throat Mic, w/Acoustic Tube, body and Ring PTT Bluetooth, Covert, Earpiece/MIC/PTT, Radios MISCELLANEOUS ACCESSORIES Cable, Data Interface Cable, MATQ-03424, Test Cable, USB, Key Loading/Programming Cable, KVL, Key Loading Adapter, 6-Pin Hirose Holster, Leather, Radio, Premium PART NUMBER KRE1011219/2 KRE1011506/1 KRE1011506/2 14035-4000-01 14035-4420-01 14035-4440-02 14035-4440-01 14035-4010-01 14035-1800-01 14035-1800-02 14035-4100-01 12082-0600-01 12082-0600-02 12082-0681-01 12150-4001-02 12082-0650-01 12082-0650-02 12082-0650-03 12082-0650-04 12082-0650-05 12082-0650-06 12082-0650-07 12082-0650-08 12082-0650-09 12082-0650-10 12082-0650-11 12082-0650-12 12082-0650-13 12082-0650-14 12082-0650-15 12082-0650-16 12082-0650-17 12082-0650-18 12082-0650-19 12082-0684-01 12082-0445-A1 12082-0435-A1 12082-0410-A1 12082-0400-A1 14002-0197-01 14035-4200-01 20 14221-1800-2000 DESCRIPTION Holster, Nylon, Black, Radio, Premium Holster, Ring, Leather, Radio, Premium Holster, Leather, Radio, Standard Holster, Nylon, Black, Radio, Standard Holster, Ring, Leather, Radio, Standard Belt Loop, Leather, Premium D-Swivel Strap, Shoulder Belt Loop, Leather Metal Belt Clip Holster, Leather w/Rings for Shoulder Strap, Radio, Premium Kit, 14035-4200-01 Holster Assembly w/14002-0218-01 Belt Loop Kit, 14035-4200-02 Holster Assembly w/14002-0218-01 Belt Loop Holster, Leather w/Rings for Shoulder Strap, Radio, Standard PART NUMBER 14035-4200-03 14035-4200-04 14035-4202-01 14035-4202-03 14035-4202-04 14002-0218-01 12082-3230-01 CC103333V1 KRY1011609/1 12082-1290-01 14035-4200-02 14035-4201-01 14035-4201-02 14035-4202-02 21 14221-1800-2000 4. BASIC OPERATION 4.1 XL-200P CONTROLS Figure 4-1: XL-200P Controls NOTE Table 4-1 describes the default functions of buttons, knobs, and controls. Most can be programmed for different functions; see Section 6.4 for more information. Table 4-1: XL-200P Controls, Indicators, and Connectors FUNCTION Selects groups/channels. Turn clockwise to power on radio and increase volume of audio heard from speaker. Minimum volume levels may be programmed into the radio to prevent missed calls due to a low volume setting. User-programmable switch (see Section 6.4.2). CONTROL/INDICATOR Group/Channel Knob Power/Volume Knob A/B (/O) Switch 22 14221-1800-2000 CONTROL/INDICATOR FUNCTION Microphone

(Secondary) A/B/C/D Switch User-Programmable Buttons Push-To-Talk (PTT) Button Battery Antenna Connector Emergency Button Indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) Top Display Speaker Microphones (Primary) Front Display User-Programmable Soft Keys Menu/Select Button When noise cancellation is enabled, the secondary and primary microphones are used together to form a dual microphone system. Noise cancellation improves the quality of transmitted voice. When noise cancellation is disabled, only the primary microphone is used. See Section 4.7 for detailed information on using noise cancellation. User-programmable switch (see Section 6.4.3). By default, selects one of four channel banks (see Section 4.17). Used to select a commonly used function as an alternative to navigating menus. This is configured via programming using Radio Personality Manager 2 (RPM2). See Section 6.4.1 for the options that can be programmed to these buttons. Press to transmit. Make sure Push-To-Talk (PTT) is enabled (Section 5.5). Battery - Refer to Section 3.3 for battery connection and removal. Antenna connector. Used to place radio in emergency mode (see Section 4.31). This button can be disabled via programming using RPM2. In addition, this button can be used in conjunction with a User Programmable Button to Clear Emergencies if configured to do so. Indicates radio status. Red = actively transmitting. Green = actively receiving. Orange = actively transmitting encrypted. Shows summary of radio operation, including channel/talkgroup (which can be color coded), as well as a variety of programmable icons. Display orientation can be configured for viewing from the front or rear of the radio. (Section 5.6). Radio speaker which can be muted (Section 5.5). Adjust volume using the Power/Volume knob. When noise cancellation is enabled, the primary and secondary microphones are used together to form a dual microphone system. Noise cancellation improves the quality of transmitted voice. When noise cancellation is disabled, only the primary microphones are used. See Section 4.7 for detailed information on using noise cancellation. Front display shows complete status and radio menus. User-programmable dynamic keys that have their current function labeled on the radio display directly above each button. See Section 6.4.1 for the options that can be programmed to these buttons. From the Main Display, press this button to access the menu. Also selects highlighted menu items. 23 14221-1800-2000 CONTROL/INDICATOR FUNCTION Navigation Buttons Navigates menu items. In addition:

Press while on the idle display to access Channel Information (see Section 5.4). Press while on the idle display to display the functions assigned to programmable buttons (see Section 6.4). Press to display Missed Call info. Press to end or reject an ICALL. By default, used to enter text or numbers. Can be programmed for various functions (see Section 6.4). Keypad NOTE 4.2 SOFT DTMF KEYPAD The partial keypad model of the XL-200P supports a soft DTMF keypad. This allows the radio user to utilize a graphical DTMF keypad in place of a physical DTMF keypad. The partial keypad model of the XL-200P supports a soft DTMF keypad. This allows the radio user to utilize a graphical DTMF keypad in place of a physical DTMF keypad. On screens that require keypad entry, press the KEYPAD softkey to display the keypad. Use , , , and to navigate, press the Menu/Select button to select highlighted digit, and then press the ENTER softkey. For example, when placing an Individual Call to a numeric address, the soft DTMF keypad can be used to enter the address as shown:

Figure 4-2: Using the Soft DTMF Keypad 4.3 BEFORE FIRST USE Make sure XL-200P has:

Fully charged battery Antenna attached Personality and radio programmed using RPM2 Encryption keys loaded if using encrypted channels Personality activated 24 14221-1800-2000 4.4 POWER ON AND SET VOLUME The power switch and volume control are the same knob on top of the radio (see Figure 4-1). Turn the Power/Volume Knob clockwise to power on XL-200P and increase the volume. A minimum volume level can be programmed into the radio to prevent missed calls due to a low volume setting. The radio can be programmed to require the entry of a PIN in order to operate the radio. Check with your System Administrator if you forget your PIN. As the PIN is entered, an asterisk is displayed for each digit; the actual value is not displayed. NOTE NOTE 4.5 RADIO DISPLAYS Top Display 4.5.1 The top display (Figure 4-3) shows a summary of status, such as channel number, channel short name, battery, scanning, and emergency mode. The display can be configured for viewing from the front or rear of the radio (see Section 5.6). Channel short name is programmed in RPM2. Figure 4-3: Top Display Front Display 4.5.2 Figure 4-4 shows a sample front display while on the idle screen. The idle screen appears after power up or after exiting from the menus. Figure 4-4: Sample Idle Front Display 25 14221-1800-2000 Table 4-2 describes some of the icons that may be displayed by the XL-200P. The radio menu also contains an icon glossary in the Utility Menu (see Section 4.7). Icons and their location can be customized using RPM2. Table 4-2: Radio Icons ICON DESCRIPTION ICON DESCRIPTION ICON DESCRIPTION

(Blue) Trunked Signal Strength

(Red) TX Power

(Green) Receive Signal Strength

(No Color) Channel Idle

(Orange) Transmitting Encrypted Battery Fully Charged Battery Level 100% Capacity Battery Level 75% Capacity Battery Level 50% Capacity Battery Level 25% Capacity Battery Level 5% Capacity

(Low Battery Audio Indicator) Battery Level Battery Exhausted

(RX-Only State) Battery Charging Talkaround Enabled Failsoft Bluetooth Enabled

(Blue) Bluetooth Connected Encryption Enabled Global Encryption OTAR Disabled OTAR Registered OTAR Registering OTAR Rekeying Transmit Power Level High Transmit Power Level Low RX Only Speaker Muted TX Disabled Tones Disabled PTT Disabled Monitor On VDOC Receiving Data Transmitting Data Alert(s) Present Vote Scanning Scanning Enabled Emergency RX Mail Noise Cancellation Enabled Nuisance Channel Conventional Site Unregistered Conventional Site Registered Type 99 Enabled GPS Tracking 26 4.6 STATUS MESSAGES 14221-1800-2000 The radio may display various radio Status Messages during operation. These messages are described in Table 4-3. Table 4-3: Status Messages MESSAGE PTT DENIED CALL QUEUED SYSTEM BUSY SCANNING TX EMERGENCY RX EMERGENCY WIDE AREA SCAN INVALID TALKGROUP INVALID UNIT DESCRIPTION P25 Trunked only - The radio or talkgroup is not authorized to operate on the selected system and/or talkgroup. P25 Trunked only - The system has placed the call in a request queue. P25 Trunked only - The system is busy, no channels are currently available, the queue is full, or an individual call is being attempted to a radio that is currently transmitting. The radio is scanning. An emergency call is being transmitted. An emergency call is being received. The radio displays the unit name or unit ID. P25 Trunked only - The radio has entered the Wide Area Scan mode to search for a new system. P25 Trunked only - The current talkgroup is not valid for the current system. This could happen if the site denies registration due to an unrecognized talkgroup ID. P25 Trunked only - The current unit is not valid for the current system. P25 Trunked only - Displayed when the radio is performing a registration/affiliation on a P25 trunking site. REGISTERING CTRL CHANNEL SCAN P25 Trunked only - The control channel is lost and the radio has entered the Control Channel Scan mode to search for the control channel (usually out of range indication). P25 Trunked only - Only displayed if the P25T system is configured for "EnhancedCC"

mode of operation. When the radio cannot find a Control Channel in either the trunked frequency set or the list of discovered adjacencies, the radio is able to perform a full spectrum frequency scan to find a new Control Channel. P25 Modes Only Another user has tried to call or page this radio. The user can view who the caller was by pressing the key BAND SCANNING MISSED CALL OTAR REKEY COMPLETE 4.7 MENU OTAR Rekey operation completed successfully. Press the Menu/Select button while on the idle display to access the menu. Press the or buttons to navigate the top-level menus, and press the or buttons to navigate the sub-menus. Refer to Figure 4-1 for button location. While in a menu, press the Menu/Select button to choose, activate, or toggle the selected item; similar to an enter key. Table 4-4 provides a high-level overview of the menu layout. Menu options on your radio may vary depending on available features and radio programming. TOP-LEVEL MENUS CALL SUB-MENUS EXIT EMERGENCY TALKAROUND MODE TYPE 99 TOGGLE TONE ENCODE Table 4-4: Menu Navigation DESCRIPTION Exits emergency. See Section 4.31 for more information. Enable/disable talk-around. See Section 4.22 for more information. Enable/disable T99. See Section 4.23 for more information. Analog conventional only - Transmits a programmed tone sequence on the current radio system and channel. See Section 5.19 for more information. 27 14221-1800-2000 SUB-MENUS INDIVIDUAL CALL CHANGE TLKGRP CALL ALERT CHANNEL GUARD AUDIO PLAYBACK START SCAN/STOP SCAN SCAN LISTS CUSTOM SCAN SITE ROAMING ZEROIZE KEYS GLOBAL ENCRYPTION GLOBAL KEY ACTIVE KEYSET KEYLIST OTAR OTAR REKEY RADIO STATUS RADIO MESSAGE TONES KEYPAD TONES DISPLAY SETTINGS:

COLOR SCHEME FRONT BACKLIGHT FRONT BRIGHTNESS FRONT TIMEOUT TOP BACKLIGHT TOP BRIGHTNESS TOP TIMEOUT TOP-LEVEL MENUS CALL

(Continued) SCAN SECURITY MESSAGES UTILITY 28 DESCRIPTION Allows you to select an individual for an individual call. See Section 4.13 for more information. Change the selected talkgroup. See Section 4.13.1. Select a group for Call Alert transmission. See Section 4.24. Select the Transmit and/or Receive Channel Guard tone. See Section 4.21. Playback a previously received call. See Section 4.26 for more information. Start or stop scan operation. See Sections 4.27 and 4.28. View/Edit available scan lists. See Section 5.13. Create, View, and Edit Custom Scan Lists. See Section 5.14.6. Enable/Disable Wide Area System Scan. See Section 5.14.7. Removes all encryption keys from the radio. See Section 5.20.2. Enable/Disable Global Encryption. See Section 5.20.4. Select the Global Key. Only available if Global Encryption is Enabled. See Section 5.20.4. Select the Active Keyset. See Section 5.20.5. View available key lists. See Section 5.20.6 Enable/disable Over-the-Air Rekeying (OTAR). See Section 5.20.7. Request that the KMF updates the keys in the radio. See Section 5.20.7. Used to send a particular status condition to the site without making a voice call. See Section 5.15. Used to send a particular message to the site without making a voice call. See Section 5.16. Allows the user to send a Radio TextLink message. See Section 5.17. Allows the user to send a Radio TextLink form. See Section 5.17. Contains received Radio TextLink messages. See Section 5.17 Displays radio faults and alerts. See Section 5.18. Enable or disable Noise Cancellation. See Section 4.8. Enable or disable Push-To-Talk (PTT). Disable PTT to prevent accidental keying, such as when radio is in the holster or you are getting into a car. Enable or disable radio side tones. Enable or disable tones that sound when the radios keypad buttons are pressed. Press the Menu/Select button to toggle the front and top displays COLOR SCHEME for optimum visibility in day or night conditions (NORMAL or INVERTED). Press the Menu/Select button to toggle the front display backlighting between ON/OFF/MOMENTARY. Press or to dim or brighten the display. When the FRONT BACKLIGHT setting is MOMENTARY, this value specifies how long the radio needs to be inactive before the front displays backlight turns off. Press or to change the time in 0.5 second increments. Press the Menu/Select button to toggle the top display backlighting ON/OFF/MOMENTARY. Press or to dim or brighten the display. When the TOP BACKLIGHT setting is MOMENTARY, this value specifies how long the radio needs to be inactive before the top displays backlight turns off. Press or to change the time in 0.5 second increments. TEXTLINK MESSAGES TEXTLINK FORMS TEXTLINK MAILBOX FAULTS/ALERTS AUDIO SETTINGS:

SPEAKER (MUTE/UNMUTE) Mute or unmute the speaker audio. NOISE CANCELLATION PTT TOP-LEVEL MENUS SUB-MENUS DISPLAY SETTINGS (Cont.) TOP ORIENTATION INDICATOR LED BLUETOOTH:

ENABLED (YES/NO) PAIRING MGMT CLOCK SETTINGS:

TIME FORMAT TIME ZONE GPS SETTINGS:

GPS (ENABLED/DISABLED) Enable/disable GPS. POSITION INFO ANGULAR UNITS LINEAR UNITS POSITION FORMAT 14221-1800-2000 DESCRIPTION Set orientation of top display to be viewed from radio: FRONT, BACK, or AUTO. When AUTO is selected, the radio changes the top display to be viewed from the back if an external microphone or speaker is attached. Otherwise, the display can be viewed from the front. Press the Menu/Select button to toggle the indicator LED ON or OFF. Enable/disable Bluetooth. See Section 5.9 for more information. Pair Bluetooth devices with the radio. See Section 5.9 for more information. Select 12 or 24 hour time display format. Set time zone relative to Universal Time Coordinated (UTC). Displays GPS, Latitude, Longitude, and Altitude information. Set unit of measurement of displayed angular units: CARDINAL, DEGREES, or MILS. Set unit of measurement of displayed linear units: STATUTE, METRIC, or NAUTICAL. Set format of displayed position information: Latitude/Longitude Degrees Minutes Seconds (LAT/LONG DMS), LAT/LONG DM, Military Grid Reference System (MGRS), or Universal Transverse Mercator (UTM). Displays Situational Awareness information (see Section 5.2). View/Activate a personality. See Section 5.1 Change current profile. See Section 4.8. When a smart battery is attached, displays detailed battery status information. When a regular battery is attached, displays battery voltage. Displays radio information, i.e., ESN, software revisions, and firmware revisions. Allows service personnel to run radio tests. For field service use only. When enabled, RSSI is displayed on the RSSI screen and in the bottom of the idle display. -130 dBm is displayed when there is no received signal. For field service personnel only. Improper adjustment will result in loss of communications. Displays what features are enabled on your radio. Defines icons that may be displayed by the radio. Press the Menu/Select button to toggle between available languages. UTILITY

(Continued) SA INFO PROGRAM:

ACTIVATE PLAN ACTIVATE PROFILE MAINTENANCE BATTERY INFO RADIO INFO TESTS PH2 LC DISPLAY DISPLAY RSSI TCXO TUNING FEATURE INFO ICON GLOSSARY CHANGE LANGUAGE ZONE CHANGE PIN Allows you to change your PIN. View or change zones/systems (see Sections 4.10 and 5.3.1). 29 14221-1800-2000 4.8 PREDEFINED MENU LAYOUTS Depending on radio programming, some menu options described in this manual may not be available. The XL-200P supports three predefined menu layouts: Full, Limited, and Restricted. Table 4-5 details what is available in each layout:

Table 4-5: Predefined Menu Layouts MENU FULL LIMITED RESTRICTED Call Menu Exit Emergency Talkaround Individual Call Change Talkgroup Call Alert/Page Channel Guard Voice Playback Tone Encode T99 Audio Settings Display Settings GPS Settings Clock Settings Bluetooth Settings Scan Menu Enable/Disable Scan View Scan List Edit Zone Scan List View Custom Channels Edit Custom Scan List Custom Scan Site Roam Security Menu Encryption Enable Zeroize Global CKR Enable GCKR Key Select Active Key Set Key List OTAR Enable OTAR Rekey Message Menu Radio Status Radio Message Textlink Messages 30 14221-1800-2000 MENU FULL LIMITED RESTRICTED Textlink Forms Textlink Mailbox Faults Program Menu Activate Plan Activate Profile Maintenance Menu Radio Info Battery TCXO Tuning P25 Tests RSSI Display Phase II Display Feature Info Change Language Change PIN Icon Glossary Zone 4.9 ALERT TONES The XL-200P provides audible Alert Tones or beeps to indicate various operating conditions. Some of the most common tones are described in Table 4-6. Table 4-6: Alert Tones TONE DESCRIPTION SOUND/DURATION Ready To Talk Tone Unencrypted (Analog FM or P25 digital) After a PTT is pressed, this is an audible indication (tone) for you to begin speaking into the microphone. 1000 Hz tone for 25 ms Ready to Talk Tone Encrypted P25 digital After a PTT is pressed, this is an audible indication (tone) for you to begin speaking into the microphone. 1200 Hz tone for 25 ms PTT Denied PTT not possible. Momentary tone is present:

Receive only Key not found PTT button disabled Emergency button disabled Emergency not supported for current channel Clear transmit denied Trunking Channel unavailable 544 Hz tone for 75 ms Maximum transmit duration expires Maximum transmit duration is exceeded. 5 beeps of 2400Hz tone and then a 544 Hz tone for as long as PTT is pressed. 31 14221-1800-2000 TONE DESCRIPTION SOUND/DURATION Low Battery Alarm Alarm sounds upon initial detection of low battery and every 30 seconds thereafter. Tone stops upon detection of a battery charging state. Emergency Call Received Radio is receiving an emergency call or priority call. Out of Range Radio fails to find a local control channel. 4.10 SELECT ZONE/SYSTEM 937 Hz tone for 50 ms Sequence of tones:

Silence for 60 ms 1300 Hz tone for 50 ms 600 Hz tone for 250 ms and 1800 Hz tone for 250 ms Programmable via RPM2:

Disabled (no tone) Slow (tone every 15s) Medium (tone every 10s) Fast (tone every 5s) Tones is 544 Hz tone for 75 ms A System is a group of channels or talkgroups that share a common set of parameters as programmed in RPM2. For example, a Trunking system defines the parameters needed to communicate on a particular infrastructure by agency or geographical region, such as WACN, System ID, Talkgroups, etc. A conventional system defines the channel set used and any specific signaling attributes (See RPM2 for more information on System attributes). Systems are designated by the XX icon in the Zone/System menu. A Zone is an OPTIONAL container that can hold channels or talkgroups from a variety of systems (see Section 5.3.2). In other words, each member of a Zone belongs to an underlying system. (See RPM2 for more information on Zone attributes). Zones are always listed first in the Zone/System menu and are designated by the icon. A button on the radio can be programmed to scroll through available zones/systems (see Section 6.4). Or Select a zone/system via the menu:

1. Press the Menu/Select button to access the menus. 2. Use or to display the ZONE menu. A personality can have up to 512 systems and up to 50 Zones, independent of banks or channels. 3. Use or to highlight the zone. 4. Press the VIEW ZONE soft key to view channels in the zone/system. 5. OR Select the desired zone/system using the Menu/Select button. 32 14221-1800-2000 4.11 SELECT GROUP/CHANNEL AND BANK The XL-200P can be programmed with 1,250 talkgroups or 1000 channels per personality. Use the Group/Channel knob to select groups/channels 1 - 16. Use the A/B/C/D switch to set the bank. The selected bank is indicated on the display. Bank A: Channel A1 - A16 (1-16) Bank B: Channel B1 - B16 (17-32) Bank C: Channel C1 - C16 (33-48) Bank D: Channel D1 - D16 (49-64) If your system has more than 64 groups/channels, a button on the radio can be programmed for the SEL CHAN/GRP option. This allows you to select a super bank, providing access to groups/channels beyond the first 64. Note that ZONES have a limit of 64 entries per zone and cannot be superbanked. 4.12 LOCK/UNLOCK KEYPAD There are two levels of keypad lock available. Keypad lock and Radio lock. Keypad lock only locks the navigation keys (except for use in unlock), programmable softkeys, and DTMF keypad. Radio lock disables all physical keys and knobs except The 4-position switch PTT Emergency Button Any User Programmable Button (UPB) programmed for Monitor/Clear (This is required to allow Monitor/Clear to function for 2-button emergency clear) The A/B switch, ABCD switch, or a button on the radio can be programmed to lock the keypad/radio. If the keypad was locked via a switch, moving the switch to another position will unlock the keypad. If locked via a button, the navigation keys must be used to enter the unlock sequence of Left, Right, Up Down. See Section 6.4 for the various options that can be programmed to the radio buttons and switches. NOTE 33 14221-1800-2000 4.13 GROUP CALLS 4.13.1 Change Talkgroup A talkgroup is a group of radios that you want to have private conversations with. These groups can be divided into areas such as state, region, county, or large special events. A group call can only be made on digital channels. Turn the Channel/Group knob to select the desired group (see Figure 4-1). Or A button on the radio can be programmed for DIRECT CHANNEL ENTRY to allow the user to enter the talkgroup/channel number. Or 1. In P25 Conventional, the talkgroup for the selected channel may be overridden as follows: Press the Menu/Select button to access the main menu. 2. Press or to display the CALL menu. 3. Press or to highlight CHANGE TLKGRP and press the Menu/Select button. 4. Press or to highlight and the desired talkgroup and press the Menu/Select button. After selecting the new talkgroup, the radio returns to the main screen. 5. Press PTT to transmit. 4.13.2 Receive a Group Call When receiving a group call, the radio display toggles between the Unit Name and the Group Name of the transmitting radio. Note that if either of those names is not programmed, the corresponding ID number is displayed. 4.14 INDIVIDUAL CALLS An individual call is used to make a call to one radio as opposed to a group of radios. An individual call can only be made on a digital channel. 4.14.1 Transmit an Individual Call 1. Press Menu/Select button to access the main menu. 2. Press or to display the CALL menu. 3. Press or to highlight INDIVIDUAL CALL and press the Menu/Select button. 34 14221-1800-2000 4. Use or to highlight the unit to call and press the Menu/Select button, or select KEYPAD to enter the Unit ID. 5. Press PTT to make the call. When transmitting an Individual Call, the radio displays the called radios name or Unit ID. If the radio is programmed for Acknowledged Individual Call, the radio displays CALL QUEUED until the callee answers or rejects the call. 6. After the callee answers, press PTT to respond. 7. Press to end the call. How long the radio remains in Individual Call mode with no activity is programmable. 4.14.2 Receiving an Individual Call 1. When receiving an Individual Call, the radio displays the calling radios name or Unit ID. The radio will also display Pressto END/REJECT CALL. 2. Press PTT to respond or to END/REJECT the call. How long the radio remains in the Individual Call mode with no activity is programmable. 3. The radio rings and indicates a missed call if you do not respond. The ring sounds until you press PTT, view the missed call menu (), change channel/group/system, or power cycle the radio. 4. Press to end the call. 4.15 PROFILES The XL-200P supports a Covert profile. The following attributes apply when the Covert profile is active:

The speaker is enabled. All tones are disabled. Keypad tones are disabled. Voice Annunciation is disabled. The front display backlight is disabled The top backlight is turned off. The indicator LED is disabled. All other attributes remain at their current value. To change the currently selected Profile:

1. Press the Menu/Select button to access the menu. 2. Press or until the UTILITY menu is displayed. 3. Press or to highlight PROGRAM and press the Menu/Select button. 35 14221-1800-2000 4. Press or until the PROFILES menu is displayed. 5. Press or to select the desired Profile (COVERT or NONE) and press the Menu/Select button. A profile change persists across system/channel changes, power cycles, and personality changes. A button on the radio keypad can be used to toggle profiles. See Section 6.4.1. NOTE 4.16 NOISE CANCELLATION The XL-200P features Harris proprietary noise suppression capability to provide clear and crisp voice quality in high-noise environments. This can be used in any mode, including analog and digital communications. The XL-200P has three microphones; two located at the top of the radio (primary) and one on the bottom

(secondary). When noise cancellation is enabled, voice is picked up by the upper left microphone, and noise is picked up from the bottom microphone. In the case where noise cancellation is enabled and a speaker microphone is attached to the XL-200P, talk into the speaker microphone. In this mode, XL-200P top left microphone is used to pick up the surrounding noise, and the other microphones are unused. See Section 4.16.4 for more information. If the bottom (secondary) microphone is blocked, the XL-200P operates as though noise cancellation is turned off. 4.16.1 Enable Noise Cancellation To enable Noise Cancellation:

1. Press the Menu/Select button to access the menu. 2. Press or until the UTILITY menu is displayed. 3. Press or to highlight AUDIO SETTINGS and press the Menu/Select button. 4. Press or to highlight NOISE CANCELLATION. Toggle Noise Cancellation ENABLED/DISABLED using the Menu/Select button. Refer to Section 5.5 for more information on the Audio Settings menu. 36 14221-1800-2000 4.16.2 Using Noise Cancellation When using the noise cancellation feature, observe the following:

Verify NOISE CANCELLATION is enabled (see Section 4.16.1). Ensure the primary and secondary microphones are not covered. See Section 4.16.4 for more information on the primary and secondary microphones. Talk within two (2) inches of the primary microphones (see Figure 4-5). Speak clearly, loudly, and with authority. If possible, face the noise source when talking into the radio (see Figure 4-5). In very noisy environments, it is o.k. to yell into the radio. The radio can handle loud input levels. Figure 4-5: Using Noise Cancellation 4.16.3 The Effect of Distance from the Microphone Unlike a normal microphone system, noise cancellation makes the level of your voice diminish quickly as you move away from the radio. In essence, the radio starts to see your voice as surrounding noise. Whereas, you may be comfortable speaking up to a foot away under normal operation, noise cancellation requires that you hold the radio close. 4.16.4 Primary versus Secondary Microphone 4.16.4.1 Without a Speaker Microphone Attached The primary microphones are located on top of the radio and the secondary is on the bottom of the radio

(refer to Figure 4-1 for microphone locations). 4.16.4.2 With a Speaker Microphone Attached When a speaker microphone is attached, the radio electronically switches over to use the radios top left microphone as secondary. The microphone on the attached speaker microphone becomes primary. 4.16.5 When using an SCBA Mask When using an SCBA mask, the primary microphone can be held directly against the voice port. If the SCBA has a voice amplifier, the same rule applies. Ensure that the secondary microphone is uncovered. If possible, point the secondary microphone toward the noise source. 37 14221-1800-2000 4.17 PTT OPTIONS The radio can be programmed via RPM2 with one of the following PTT options:

Radio and Accessory In this mode, when the radio is PTTd the audio source will correspond with the PTT source. If the source of PTT is radio, the audio is routed via the radio microphone. If the source of PTT is an external microphone accessory, the audio is routed via the external microphone accessory. Accessory Only - Any PTT input will have the audio routed through the external microphone accessory. The Bluetooth Speaker Mic is unaffected by this setting. PTTing the Bluetooth Speaker Mic always results in audio being routed via the Bluetooth Speaker Mic. NOTE 4.18 VOICE ANNUNCIATION When enabled via programming, Voice Annunciation provides audible feedback for various radio operations. The radio can be programmed to play an audio message for any or all of the following. This message can be a pre-recorded (canned) message or a user-recorded message. Zone changes Channel changes System changes Encryption On/Off Noise Cancellation On/Off Scan On/Off Talkaround On/Off Monitor Mode On/Off 2 or 4 Position switch change For more information on configuring the radio for Voice Annunciation, refer to the Voice Annunciation Feature manual 14221-7200-6110. 38 14221-1800-2000 4.19 ENABLE/DISABLE ENCRYPTION A switch or a button on the radio can be programmed to enable/disable encryption. See Section 6.4 for the various options that can be programmed to the radio buttons and switches. NOTE Or Turn encryption on or off via the Security Menu:

1. Press the Menu/Select button to access the menus. 2. Use the or button to highlight and select the SECURITY menu. 3. Use the or button to highlight ENCRYPTION. Toggle encryption enabled/disabled using the Menu/Select button. This option is grayed out if any switch is programmed for encryption, or if Encryption Mode in the radios personality is programmed Forced On. If a channel is programmed to be encrypted, an optional key icon appears on the main display when encryption is enabled. The system must also be programmed for encryption. When encryption is enabled and you use any channel not configured for encryption, the radio allows PTT. The signal is transmitted unencrypted. Systems configured for Global Encryption (enabled in the Security menu) can display an optional Global Encryption icon in addition to or instead of a key icon (Section 5.20.3). 4.20 TRANSMIT ENABLE/DISABLE When transmit is disabled, all forms of transmission from the radio are disabled, including Bluetooth. This is designed for use in explosive atmospheres. If enabled via programming, use the A/B switch to enable or disable transmit. See Section 6.4 for the various options that can be programmed to the radio buttons and switches. NOTE 39 14221-1800-2000 4.21 CHANNEL GUARD (ANALOG CONVENTIONAL ONLY) Channel Guard is Harriss trademark for CTCSS (tone squelch) and CDCSS (digital tone squelch). The Channel Guard menu is only accessible if the System is setup for CG SEL in the radios personality. NOTE To select the Channel Guard tone:

1. Press Menu/Select button to access the main menu. 2. Use or to display the CALL menu. 3. Use or to highlight CHANNEL GUARD and press the Menu/Select button. 4. Use or to highlight RECEIVE GUARD or TRANSMIT GUARD and press the Menu/Select button. 5. Use or to highlight the desired option from the list and select using the Menu/Select button. 6. The Channel Guard frequency is displayed on the main display. The Channel Info screen and Channel Edit screen will change depending on this selection. See Sections 5.4 and 6.2 for more information. A button on the radio can be programmed for Channel Guard Override (see Section 6.4). NOTE 40 14221-1800-2000 4.22 USE TALKAROUND TO BYPASS REPEATER (ANALOG AND P25 CONVENTIONAL ONLY) You can bypass the repeater system to communicate directly with other radios on your current channels receive frequency. This is useful if you are out of range of a repeater or if a repeater is busy. You will need to be in range of the other radio. 1. Press Menu/Select button to access the main menu. 2. Press or to display the CALL menu. 3. Press or to highlight TALKAROUND MODE. 4. Press the Menu/Select button to toggle TALKAROUND MODE to ENABLED. 5. The optional Talkaround icon appears. Calls are now made on the receive frequency until you disable talkaround mode via the CALL menu. Power cycling the radio does not disable talkaround. Or A button or switch can be programmed to toggle talkaround enable/disabled. See Section 6.4 for the various options that can be programmed to the radio buttons and switches. If the Talk-Around Indication feature is enabled in RPM2, the radio will play a unique grant tone when a call is placed on a simplex channel or when Talk-Around has been enabled on a duplex channel. This feature applies to both Analog and P25 Conventional systems. It optionally allows the radio to also play the same tone when it receives a call while operating in simplex or Talk-Around. If configured, the radio plays the tone at the selected volume level. The tone will not play on systems configured with MDC. NOTE Talk-Around Indication can be specified for each individual Analog and P25 Conventional system configured in personality. The following options can be selected, and apply only when the radio is on a simplex channel or when Talk-Around has been enabled by the user:

Disabled: (This is the default option.) When this option is selected, the radio plays the standard grant tone when a call is placed. The radio does not play a tone when a call is received. Transmit Only: When this option is selected, the radio plays a different Talk-Around grant tone when a call is placed. The radio does not play a tone when a call is received. Transmit & Receive: When this option is selected, the radio plays a different Talk-Around grant tone when a call is placed, and at the beginning of a received call. 41 14221-1800-2000 In the radio personality, the Alert Tone parameter needs to be enabled for each channel on the Conventional Frequency Set. The Ready To Talk Tone parameter must also be enabled for the Talk Around Indication tone to be played when the radio is keyed. NOTE 4.23 TYPE 99 OPERATION Type 99 is Harris' name for in-band, two-tone sequential signaling. It is a conventional signaling protocol used to control the muting and unmuting of a radio. This signaling is commonly used for selective calling of individual units or groups of units in a conventional system. In Type 99 tone systems, calls are not heard until the radio detects the proper two-tone sequence. This, in conjunction with squelch, prevents the user from hearing noise or undesired conversations. When the radio detects the second tone, it sounds the appropriate Type 99 alert tone. After the second tone stops, the receiver audio path is opened in order for the user to receive messages. 4.23.1 Enable/Disable Type 99 1. Press Menu/Select button to access the main menu. 2. Press or to display the CALL menu. 3. Press or to highlight T99 TOGGLE. 4. Press the Menu/Select button to change T99 TOGGLE between ENABLED and DISABLED. T99 is displayed in the top of the radio display when Type 99 is enabled. Or A button or switch can be programmed to enable/disable Type 99 (see Section 6.4). 4.23.2 Disable After PTT If this option is programmed in RPM2, Type 99 is disabled after the radio user activates the PTT. This allows the radio user to monitor traffic on the channel (after a PTT action) without pressing the monitor button. Can be used in conjunction with the Auto Reset option (see Section 4.23.3) to disable Type 99 after a PTT and automatically reset, or enable, Type 99 after 30 seconds. 4.23.3 Auto Reset If this option is programmed in RPM2, Type 99 is automatically reset, or turned back on, after 30 seconds. Can be used in conjunction with the Disable After PTT option (see Section 4.23.2) to disable Type 99 after a PTT and automatically reset, or enable, Type 99 after 30 seconds. 42 14221-1800-2000 4.24 CALL ALERT (PAGE) 4.24.1 Send Alert 1. Press the Menu/Select button to access the main menu. 2. Press or to display the CALL menu. 3. Press or to highlight CALL ALERT and press the Menu/Select button. 4. Press or to highlight the desired unit from the list and press the Menu/Select button, or select KEYPAD to enter the Unit ID. 5. Press PTT to send the page. 4.24.2 Receive Alert 1. When receiving a Call Alert, the radio displays the calling radios name or Unit ID. 2. The radio rings and indicates a missed call. The ring sounds continuously until you press PTT, press the CLR MISSED softkey, change group/system, or power cycle the radio. 4.25 DTMF The XL-200P supports the transmission of DTMF tones corresponding to the numbers/characters on the keypad. To overdial numbers/characters, press and hold the PTT button, and then press the corresponding keys one at a time on the keypad. Valid keys for DTMF tones are: (1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, *, 0, and #). For conventional or P25 Conventional systems, DTMF tones only play if the current system is programmed for DTMF (part of general System configuration). DTMF tones are always enabled for P25 Trunking systems. NOTE 4.26 AUDIO PLAYBACK The Audio Playback feature allows the user to playback a previously received call. Recordings are stored in the radios RAM and are not persistent across power cycles. The radio stores the last five (5) recorded calls. To playback a previously received call:

1. Press the Menu/Select button. 2. Press or to display the CALL menu. 3. Press or to highlight AUDIO PLAYBACK and press the Menu/Select button. 43 14221-1800-2000 4. Select the desired call from the list. The most recent call is at the top of the list. A button on the radio can be programmed to replay the last recorded call. NOTE 4.27 START SCAN This procedure assumes that the scan list has been added and the radio is not in active scan. Refer to Section 5.13 for scan setup or Section 4.28 for stopping scan. Refer to Section 5.14.1.1, Section 5.14.1.2, and Section 5.14.1.3 for home and priority channel descriptions. 1. Press the Menu/Select button to access the main menu. 2. Press or to display the SCAN menu. 3. Press or to highlight START SCAN and press the Menu/Select button. START SCAN text changes to STOP SCAN. 4. Press the BACK soft key to exit the scan menu. 5. The scan icon is displayed on the idle display when scanning is enabled. Or 1. Press the Menu/Select button to access the main menu. 2. Press or to display the SCAN menu. 3. Press or to highlight SCAN LISTS and press the Menu/Select button. 4. Press or to highlight the desired SCAN LIST and press the START SCAN soft key. Or A switch or button on the radio can be programmed to start/stop scan. 44 NOTE NOTE 14221-1800-2000 If a switch is programmed for start/stop scan, the menu for starting and stopping scan is disabled. See Section 6.4 for the various options that can be programmed to the radio buttons and switches. 4.28 STOP SCAN 1. Press the Menu/Select button to access the main menu. 2. Press or to display the SCAN menu. 3. Press or to highlight STOP SCAN and press the Menu/Select button. 4. Press the BACK soft key to exit the scan menu. Or 1. Press the Menu/Select button to access the main menu. 2. Press or to display the SCAN menu. 3. Press or to highlight SCAN LISTS and press the Menu/Select button. 4. Press the STOP SCAN soft key. Or A switch or button on the radio can be programmed to start/stop scan. If a switch or button is programmed for start/stop scan, the menu for starting and stopping scan are disabled. See Section 6.4 for the various options that can be programmed to the radio buttons and switches. NOTE NOTE 45 14221-1800-2000 4.29 MONITOR AND SQUELCH TYPES (CONVENTIONAL ONLY) The monitor function allows you to temporarily turn off selected squelch to monitor for traffic that may not normally break squelch. The type of squelch used depends on an analog or digital channel. A button or switch on the radio can be programmed to start or stop Monitor (see Section 6.4 for the various options that can be programmed to the radio buttons and switches.). For analog channels, there is:

Noise squelch - any received signal breaks squelch. Continuous Tone Coded Squelch (CTCSS) - squelch is selective based on tone code. Continuous Digital Coded Squelch (CDCSS) - squelch is selective based on digital code. For digital channels, there is:

Monitor squelch - any received digital signal breaks squelch. Normal squelch - Received Network Access Code (NAC) must be correct to break squelch. Selective squelch - Received NAC and talkgroup Identification (ID) or unit ID must be correct to break squelch. During encrypted operations, the radio only unmutes when receiving with the same key. NOTE 4.30 NUISANCE DELETE A channel can temporarily be deleted from the scan list. The selected channel, priority 1, and priority 2 channels cannot be nuisance deleted. A button or switch on the radio can be programmed for nuisance delete (see Section 6.4 for the various options that can be programmed to the radio buttons and switches). Nuisance delete can only be performed on the active scan list. NOTE To perform nuisance delete from the menu:

1. Press the Menu/Select button to access the main menu. 2. Press or to display the SCAN menu. 3. Press or to highlight SCAN LISTS and press the Menu/Select button. 4. Press or to highlight the scan list and press the Menu/Select button. indicates the active scan list 46 14221-1800-2000 5. Press or to highlight the desired channel. 6. Press the OPTIONS soft key. 7. Press or to highlight NUISANCE and press the Menu/Select button. 8. The icon appears next to the channel and it will not be scanned. 9. Highlight the channel, press the OPTIONS soft key, and select ADD BACK to add channel back to scan list. If you do not add the channel back to the list, the channel will return to the scan list when you cycle radio power or activate a personality. 10. Press the BACK soft key to exit the channel list. 11. Press the BACK soft key to exit the scan list display. 4.31 EMERGENCY OPERATION The XL-200P can be programmed to enable emergency mode. Unit name displays on dispatcher console if an emergency signal is received from another XL-200P on a digital channel. 4.31.1 Declaring an Emergency Call 1. Press and hold the emergency button on the radio or the speaker microphone. The length of time you need to hold the button is configured in RPM2. 2. The emergency icon is displayed on the idle display. For digital channels, the radio transmits the talkgroup or radio ID to the dispatch console and receiving radio. The radio can be programmed to have a dedicated emergency channel, which can be activated from analog or digital channels. The radio can also be programmed to send an Emergency Alarm in addition to or in place of the emergency call (P25 modes). The radio goes through transmit and receive cycles if so configured. Speak into the microphone while the radio is transmitting or press PTT to talk. 47 14221-1800-2000 3. To exit emergency, power cycle the radio or select EXIT EMERGENCY from the CALL menu. If enabled via programming, you can clear an emergency by pressing the button programmed for the Monitor/Clear function and then the emergency button. 4.31.2 Receiving an Emergency Call When receiving an Emergency Call, an alert beep sounds (if tones are enabled) and an emergency indication is displayed. The unit ID and/or unit name of the unit in emergency is displayed. While the emergency display is active, press PTT to respond to the emergency caller. 4.31.3 Stealth Emergency The radio can be programmed with the following emergency behavior:

No audio indications when declaring an emergency. No visual indications when declaring an emergency. Or Or No audio and no visual indications when declaring an emergency. During stealth mode, the radio will not receive any type of call. Once the user presses the PTT button, the radio display and audio returns to normal. 4.32 MDC-1200 (ANALOG CONVENTIONAL ONLY) MDC-1200 is a legacy in-band signaling protocol that provides the radio with the ability to transmit and receive a unique PTT ID. This PTT ID can be decoded by receiving radios and displayed as a hexadecimal number or an alias string. In addition, MDC-1200 provides radios with the ability to transmit emergency status to a console. Refer to the MDC-1200 Feature Manual, 14221-7200-6000, for complete instructions on configuring and using this feature. 4.32.1 Normal PTT Operation If MDC signaling on PTT press is enabled in RPM2, the radio transmits an MDC PTT ID message when PTT is pressed. If the Sidetone option is enabled in RPM2, the radio plays a Ready-to-Talk (RTT) tone after the MDC pre-signaling has been transmitted. If MDC signaling on PTT release is enabled (in RPM2), the radio transmits post-call MDC signaling when PTT is released. IF STE is enabled (in RPM2), the MDC post-call signaling is transmitted after STE is sent on PTT release only. MDC post-call signaling is also sent when there is a radio unkey due to Carrier Control Timeout

(CCT). Normal CCT alert tones occur prior to unkey. 4.32.2 MDC PTT ID Receive Handling When the radio receives an MDC PTT ID, it searches the MDC ID Alias List for an alias associated with the ID. If one is found, it displays the alias. If none is found, the radio displays the ID in hexadecimal. 48 14221-1800-2000 4.32.3 Emergency Declaration Emergency declaration is accomplished by the radio generating an MDC Emergency PTT message. An Emergency is considered acknowledged when the radio receives an Ack To Emergency PTT message with an ID which matches its own ID. If Emergency Audio is enabled and the PTT Sidetone option is enabled, the radio plays the Ready-to-Talk tone after the MDC Emergency PTT signaling is transmitted. If an MDC Alert on ACK is enabled, the radio plays an ACK tone when the MDC emergency is acknowledged. If audio tones are enabled, the radio plays an ACK tone if the emergency is not acknowledged within the programmed number of retries. 49 14221-1800-2000 5. ADVANCED OPERATIONS 5.1 VIEW/CHANGE PERSONALITIES Personalities contain radio programming information such as frequencies, channels, stations, and talk groups. Up to 10 different personalities can be stored in the radio, but only one can be activated at a time. 5.1.1 View Personalities To view a personality:

1. At main display, press the Menu/Select button to access the main menu. 2. Press or to display the UTILITY menu. 3. Press or to highlight PROGRAM and press the Menu/Select button. An arrow indicates the currently active personality. 4. Press the OPTIONS soft key. 5. Select VIEW PLAN INFO to view. 6. The radio displays the plans filename. Personality information appears if the field was filled out in RPM2. 5.1.2 Change Active Personality To change the active personality:

1. At main display, press the Menu/Select button to access the main menu. 2. Press or to display the UTILITY menu. 3. Press or to highlight PROGRAM and press the Menu/Select button. 50 14221-1800-2000 4. Press or to highlight the desired personality and press the Menu/Select button. indicates the currently active personality. 5. Press the YES soft key to confirm personality activation. If the personality has a power-up PIN, you are prompted to enter the PIN before activation continues. 6. The IN PROGRESS screen is displayed while plan activation is in progress. 7. If personality is activated, the radio displays PLAN COMPLETE followed by the name of the personality. Press the OK soft key. You cannot activate a personality when the radio is transmitting an emergency. A FAILED message may be displayed for errors such as invalid syntax in the fill or some other invalid parameter. 5.2 SITUATIONAL AWARENESS (SA) P25 CONVENTIONAL ONLY Situational Awareness is a feature in which the XL-200P receives SA position from other units configured to send the SA packets. The SA display shows the positions of the other radios (units) relative to the XL-200P. To make use of SA, all radios need to have a uniquely programmed Unit ID. 1. Press the Menu/Select button to access the main menu. 2. Press or to display the UTILITY menu. 3. Press or to select GPS and press the Menu/Select button. 4. Press or to select POSITION INFO and press the Menu/Select button. 51 14221-1800-2000 5. Press the NEXT soft key. 6. Press or to view location of each unit. The color of each unit indicates its status as follows. Only one status can be shown at a time and are listed in priority order:

Grey Unselected, no status Red Unselected, In Emergency Orange Unselected, Low Battery Blue - Unselected, Scanning Green Selected, no status Green/Red Selected, In Emergency Green/Orange Selected, Low Battery Green/Blue - Selected, Scanning 7. GPS of this radio is shown by the center dot as follows:

Green Tracking Orange Last known position Red Searching 8. Press or to zoom the display distance of current unit. 9. Press the OPTIONS soft key. From here, select UNIT INFO to display details about the selected unit, select REFRESH to update information, or select EXIT. 5.3 USER-DEFINED ZONES/SYSTEMS 5.3.1 Command Tactical Zone A Command Tactical Zone is defined on-the-fly at the radio. A Command Tactical Zone is reset when a Personality is activated. NOTE To create a Command Tactical Zone:

1. Press the Menu/Select button to access the main menu. 2. Press or to display the ZONE menu. 52 14221-1800-2000 3. Press or to highlight <USER-DEFINED> and press the VIEW ZONE soft key. 4. Press the OPTIONS soft key. 5. Press or to select EDIT ZONE to create a zone, or RENAME ZONE to rename the Command Tactical Zone (up to 16 characters are allowed). 6. Press or to scroll through existing systems. Press or to highlight desired channel/group. 7. Press the Menu/Select button to add or remove channel/group. 8. After adding all desired channels/groups, press the BACK soft key. 9. Activate the Command Tactical Zone by selecting the SET ACTIVE soft key on the USER DEFINED screen, or by pressing the Menu/Select button when <USER DEFINED> is highlighted on the Zone menu. 10. After a creating a Command Tactical Zone, select OPTIONS to edit the Command Tactical Zone, delete channels/groups, clear the zone, and rename the zone. 5.3.2 Mixed System Zone Mixed System Zones are defined in RPM2 and cannot be edited on the radio. If a Mixed System Zone is not configured in RPM2, it will not appear on the radio. Up to 50 Mixed System Zones can be defined. You can view details about each channel/group. A user programmable button can be defined to scroll through just the mixed system zones. 1. Press the Menu/Select button to access the main menu. 2. Press or to display the ZONE menu. 3. Press or to highlight the desired zone (Note: Zones are indicated by icon) and select VIEW ZONE to view the groups/channels in the the zone list. 53 14221-1800-2000 5.4 CH INFO MENU The Channel Information (CH INFO) menu displays information about the currently selected channel. The information displayed varies between conventional and trunked systems. 1. Press while on the idle display. 2. Press or to scroll through the programmed channel settings. CONVENTIONAL OR P25 CHANNELS ONLY:

3. Press the EDIT soft key. 4. Enter the password. You may now select and change the values of the displayed channel parameters. The password remains active until power cycle. Refer to Section 6.2 for more information. 5.5 AUDIO SETTINGS Set audio settings such as speaker mute, noise cancellation, PTT, and tones. 1. Press the Menu/Select button to access the main menu. 2. Press or to display the UTILITY menu. 3. Press or highlight AUDIO SETTINGS and press the Menu/Select button. 4. Press or to scroll through available audio settings. Press the Select/Menu button to change settings as desired:

SPEAKER - Mute or Unmute the speaker audio. NOISE CANCELLATION - Enable or disable noise cancellation. Noise cancellation reduces background noise during transmit. PTT - Enable or disable Push-To-Talk (PTT). Disable PTT to prevent accidental keying, such as when the radio is in a holster or you are getting into a car. TONES - Enable or disable alert tones (see Table 4-6). KEYPAD TONES - Enable or disable keypad tones. When enabled, the radio plays a tone when a button on the keypad is pressed. 5. Press the BACK soft key to exit menu. 54 5.6 DISPLAY SETTINGS 14221-1800-2000 1. Press the Menu/Select button to access the main menu. 2. Press or to display the UTILITY Menu. 3. Press or to highlight DISPLAY SETTINGS and press the Menu/Select button. 4. Press or and the Select/Menu button to change settings as desired:

COLOR SCHEME - Change the color scheme of the top and front displays for optimum viewing in day/night conditions. FRONT BACKLIGHT - Turn front display backlight on, off, or momentary. FRONT BRIGHTNESS - Set brightness level of front display. A level of 0 has same effect as turning off backlight. FRONT TIMEOUT - Specify how long the radio needs to be inactive before the front displays backlight turns off. TOP BACKLIGHT - Specify how long the top displays backlight will remain lit: MOMENTARY, ON, or OFF. TOP BRIGHTNESS - Set the brightness level of the top display. A level of 0 turns off top display and indicator (TX/RX) LED. TOP TIMEOUT - Specify how long the radio needs to be inactive before the top displays backlight turns off. TOP ORIENTATION - Set orientation of top display to be viewed from radio: FRONT, BACK, or AUTO. When AUTO is selected, the XL-200P changes top display to be viewed from back if an external microphone or speaker is attached. Otherwise, the display can be viewed from the front. INDICATOR LED - Toggle the indicator LED ON/OFF. 5. Press the BACK soft key to exit the menu. 55 14221-1800-2000 5.7 GPS SETTINGS The GPS SETTINGS menu item only appears if enabled in RPM2 and the feature is installed. NOTE 1. Press the Menu/Select button to access the main menu. 2. Press or to display the UTILITY menu. 3. Press or to highlight GPS SETTINGS and press the Menu/Select button. 4. Use or and the Select/Menu button to change settings as desired:

GPS - Enable or disable internal GPS. LINEAR UNITS - Set unit of measurement of displayed linear units:

STATUTE, METRIC, or NAUTICAL. ANGULAR UNITS - Set unit of measurement of displayed angular units: CARDINAL, DEGREES, or MILS. POSITION FORMAT- Set format of displayed position information:

Latitude/Longitude Degrees Minutes Seconds (LAT/LONG DMS), LAT/LONG DM, Military Grid Reference System (MGRS), or Universal Transverse Mercator (UTM). 5. Press the BACK soft key to exit the menu. 5.8 POSITION INFO The Position Info screen displays the radio users location information. GPS must be enabled in the GPS Settings (see Section 5.7). 1. Press the Menu/Select button to access the main menu. 2. Press or to display the UTILITY menu. 3. Press or to highlight POSITION INFO and press the Menu/Select button. 4. Press or to scroll through available location information. 56 5.9 WI-FI 14221-1800-2000 The XL-200P supports programming via Wi-Fi. Refer to Appendix A for more information on Wi-Fi programming. To enable Wi-Fi programming mode:

1. Ensure the radio is powered off. 2. Press and hold the bottom side button and PTT button (see Figure 3-1). 3. Power on the radio. Figure 5-1: Enabling Wi-Fi 5.10 BLUETOOTH The BLUETOOTH menu item only appears if enabled in RPM2 and if the feature is installed. NOTE 5.10.1 Enable Bluetooth 1. Press the Menu/Select button to access the main menu. 2. Press or to display the UTILITY menu. 3. Press or to highlight BLUETOOTH and press the Menu/Select button. 4. Press or to highlight ENABLED and press the Menu/Select button to toggle YES/NO. 57 14221-1800-2000 5.10.2 Pair Devices 1. Press the Menu/Select button to access the main menu. 2. Press or to display the UTILITY menu. 3. Press or to highlight BLUETOOTH and press the Menu/Select button. 4. Press or to highlight PAIRING MGMT and press the Menu/Select button. 5. Make sure device being paired is powered on and has discovery mode enabled in order to pair with the XL-200P. If no devices are found and Bluetooth is enabled, only the ADD NEW soft key is available. If devices are paired, the OPTIONS soft key appears. 6. Press the ADD NEW soft key to select a device to pair. 7. A list of available Bluetooth devices appears. 8. Press the REFRESH soft key to refresh the device list if the desired device does not appear. 9. Press or highlight the desired device and press the PAIR softkey. 10. Pairing progress is displayed. For Bluetooth 2.0 devices, a pin code screen appears. Enter the pin code and select OK. For Bluetooth 2.1 devices, a PASSKEY accept/deny screen appears. Select ACCEPT. Accept the passkey on the Bluetooth 2.1 device as well. 11. A message appears when pairing is complete. Select OK. The paired device is then displayed in the PAIRED DEVICES list. 58 5.11 CLOCK SETTINGS 14221-1800-2000 1. Press the Menu/Select button to access the main menu. 2. Press or to display the UTILITY menu. 3. Press or to highlight CLOCK SETTINGS and press the Menu/Select button. 4. Use or and Menu/Select button to change settings as desired:

TIME FORMAT- Set 12 or 24 hour time display format. TIME ZONE - Set time zone relative to Universal Time Coordinated

(UTC). 5. Press the BACK soft key to exit. 5.12 BATTERY SETTINGS 1. Press the Menu/Select button to access the main menu. 2. Press or to display the UTILITY menu. 3. Press or to highlight BATTERY INFO and press the Menu/Select button. 4. Battery information is displayed (state, voltage, capacity, and chemistry). Use only Harris approved batteries. Injury could occur from using incorrect battery. WARNING 59 14221-1800-2000 5.13 SELECT LANGUAGE To change the language displayed by the XL-200P:

1. Press the Menu/Select button to access the main menu. 2. Press or to display the UTILITY menu. 3. Press or to highlight CHANGE LANGUAGE and press the Menu/Select button. 4. Press or to highlight the desired language and press the Menu/Select button. 5.14 SET UP SCAN These procedures are used to set up the scan list, home channels, and priority channels. 1. Press the Menu/Select button to access the main menu. 2. Press or to display the SCAN menu. 3. Press or to highlight SCAN LISTS and press the Menu/Select button. Refer to the following sections. When using Preemptive Priority Scan, the frequencies in the list need to be unique. NOTE 5.14.1 Default, Priority 1, and Priority 2 Channels 5.14.1.1 Default Channel This is the currently selected channel and is the channel you transmit on by default when you press PTT while the radio is actively scanning and is not responding to a just received call. Responding to a call the radio just received while scanning is called hang time. If hang time is set to 0 in RPM2, the radio always transmits on the default channel in scan. 5.14.1.2 Priority 1 Channel This channel will be scanned more often than other channels in the list and will be scanned in between every other channel in the scan list. An example scan sequence would be P1 (priority 1), C2, P1, C3, P1, C4, etc. In addition, the priority channel will be scanned even while actively receiving on a non-priority channel. For example, if the radio is actively receiving on C3 and activity is detected on P1, the radio will drop C3 and switch to P1. 60 14221-1800-2000 5.14.1.3 Priority 2 Channel This channel will also be scanned more often than others. An example scan sequence would be P1, C2, P1, C3, P1, C4, P2, C5, P1, C6, P1, C7, P1, C8, P2, C9 etc. In addition, this channel will be scanned even while actively receiving on a non-priority channel. For example, if the radio is actively receiving on C3 and activity is detected on P2, the radio will drop C3 and switch to P2. Additionally, activity on P1 can also preempt P2, but P2 cannot preempt P1. 5.14.2 Trunked/Conventional Scanning Trunked/conventional scanning adds the ability to scan multiple conventional and P25 conventional channels while still maintaining P25 trunked radio operation. In essence, the radio is able to scan a conventional scan list while still receiving a P25 trunked control channel and receiving P25 trunked calls. Selection of which conventional scan list is associated with a given trunked system is done in RPM2 and cannot be changed on the radio. However, a user with access to the necessary menu layout (see Section 4.8) is allowed to edit the scan list members (both trunked groups and conventional channels on the selected Conventional Priority System). As the number of conventional channels being scanned increases, the time between scanning each channel increases (roughly 250 milliseconds per channel), with the consequent increase in the number of calls that will late-enter. In order to avoid missing calls, it is recommended to keep the number of conventional channels being scanned to eight (8) or fewer. The trunking site must have roaming set to Enhanced CC. NOTE 5.14.3 Vote Scan (Analog and P25 Conventional Only) If vote scan is enabled via RPM2, the radio automatically selects the strongest signal ensuring that the best audio quality is delivered to the user. If vote scan is enabled, the radio is always scanning. You cannot stop scanning, start normal scanning, or monitor the channel. The scanning icon on the idle screen indicates that the radio is vote scanning versus, regular scanning. Figure 5-2: Vote Scan Enabled If Talkaround is enabled, Vote Scan is disabled until Talkaround is disabled again. NOTE 61 14221-1800-2000 5.14.4 Edit Scan List Depending on the scan list options selected in RPM2, you may be able to add or remove channels/groups from the scan list. 1. Press the Menu/Select button. 2. Press or to display the SCAN menu. 3. Press or to select SCAN LISTS. 4. Press or to highlight the scan list and press the Menu/Select button. 5. Press or to highlight channel/group. 6. Select OPTIONS. 7. Press or to select ADD CHAN/DELETE CHAN, SET PRI1, SET PRI2, REMOVE PRI, or NUISANCE/ADD BACK. When a channel is not grayed out in the list, DELETE CHAN appears. When a channel/group is grayed out (not in list), ADD CHAN appears. 8. Press the Menu/Select button to toggle selection. 5.14.5 Set or Remove Priority 1 and Priority 2 Channels Priority channels are scanned more often than non-priority channels. Note that P1 and P2 can only be set if configured as Keypad and the scan list is not set to Fixed in RPM2. 1. Press the Menu/Select button. 2. Press or to display the SCAN menu. 3. Press or to highlight SCAN LISTS and press the Menu/Select button. 4. Press or to highlight channel/group. 5. Select OPTIONS. 62 14221-1800-2000 6. Press or to highlight SET PRI1 or SET PRI2 and press the Menu/Select button. A Priority 1 channel appears with a P1 and a Priority 2 channel appears with a P2. 7. Select REMOVE PRI to remove priority. 5.14.6 Custom Scan Lists The Mixed Zone Scan (MZS) feature gives the user the capability to scan based on a custom scan list that is assigned at the system level. The Custom Scan (CS) list can contain System and Channel/Group configurations across P25 Trunked, P25 Conventional, and Analog Systems. When a Custom Scan List is assigned to a P25T system, the radio can scan P25T, P25C and Analog systems. When assigned to a P25C or Analog system, the radio only scans conventional channels. MZS also gives the user the capability to scan beyond the selected system group set. P25T Scan When a custom scan list is assigned to a P25T system, the user has the ability to scan P25T, P25C, and Analog groups/channels. All P25T systems must have the same WACN, System ID, and Unit ID to be added to the custom scan list. If P25C and/or analog channels are added to the custom scan list, the radio will scan them using the Trunked/Conventional scan feature described in section 5.14.2, and will override any other conventional scan list that may have been programmed in RPM2. P25C and Analog Scan When a custom scan lists is assigned to a P25C or Analog System, the user has the ability to scan P25C and Analog channels. P25T systems are ignored. Custom scan list can be created in RPM or on the fly at the radio. The radio supports up to 10 Custom Scan lists, with up to 100 channels/groups in each. 5.14.6.1 Create Custom Scan List To create a custom scan list at the radio:

1. Press the Menu/Select button. 2. Press or to display the SCAN menu. 3. Press or to highlight ASSIGNED CUSTOM LIST and press the Menu/Select button. 4. Press the OPTIONS softkey. 5. Select ADD SCAN LIST. 63 14221-1800-2000 6. Press or to highlight the newly added scan list and press the VIEW/EDIT soft key. 7. Press or to display the desired system. 8. Press or to highlight the desired group/channel and press the OPTIONS softkey. From here, you can add/delete channels from the scan list, and set/remove Priority 1 and Priority 2 channels. When a custom scan list is selected, that list is scanned any time scanning is enabled for any Trunked, conventional or P25 Conventional system. To scan only the channels assigned to a particular system, custom scanning must be turned off. NOTE 5.14.7 Wide Area System Scan (P25 Trunked Only) Wide Area System Scan (WASCAN) causes the radio to roam across mobile systems when the currently selected system's control channel is lost. The radio will scan the control channels of other systems. 1. Press the Menu/Select button to access the main menu. 2. Press or to display the SCAN menu. 3. Press or to highlight SITE ROAMING and press the Menu/Select button to toggle Wide Area System Scan ENABLED/DISABLED. 4. Select BACK to exit the scan menu. 5.15 RADIO STATUS The status feature is used to send a particular status condition to the site without making a voice call. There can be up to 10 status conditions programmed into the radio. For each status defined, there is an ID and an alphanumeric name. The ID is sent to the site and the alphanumeric name appears on the radio display when the ID corresponds with the information programmed at the site. A button on the radio can be programmed to send a radio status (see Section 6.4). NOTE 64 14221-1800-2000 1. Press the Menu/Select button to access the main menu. 2. Press or to display the MESSAGES menu. 3. Press or to highlight RADIO STATUS and press the Menu/Select button. 4. Use or and the Menu/Select button to highlight and select desired status. 5.16 RADIO MESSAGE The message feature is used to send a particular message to the site without making a voice call. There can be up to 10 messages programmed into the radio. For each message defined, there is an ID and an alphanumeric name. The ID is sent to the site and the alphanumeric name appears on the radio display when the ID corresponds with the information programmed at the site. A button on the radio can be programmed to send a radio message (see Section 6.4). NOTE 1. Press the Menu/Select button to access the main menu. 2. Press or to display the MESSAGES menu. 3. Press or to highlight RADIO MESSAGE and press the Menu/Select button. 4. Use or and the Menu/Select button to highlight and select the desired message. 5.17 RADIO TEXTLINK Radio TextLink provides short text messaging functionality for radios. Because of the difficulty of entering text messages on a radio, predefined "canned" messages and predefined replies can be stored in the radio. To facilitate sending messages where information must be provided at send time, text message forms will also be stored in the radio. A form contains up to four (4) text prompts, for which the operator enters alphanumeric values before sending the message. 65 14221-1800-2000 5.17.1 Radio TextLink Messages 1. Press the Menu/Select button to access the main menu. 2. Press or to display the MESSAGES menu. 3. Press or to highlight TEXTLINK MESSAGES and press the Menu/Select button. 4. Press or to display the desired message. Press the Menu/Select button to send the message. Select CHG CALLEE to change the destination for the message. Select TOD QUERY to get the time of day. 5.17.2 Radio TextLink Forms Form messages are displayed and stored in the radio as a message in which each field to be filled is indicated by a question mark (?) followed by one or more asterisks(*). The number of asterisks indicates the maximum number of alphanumeric characters allowed for that field. 1. Press the Menu/Select button to access the main menu. 2. Press or to display the MESSAGES menu. 3. Press or to highlight TEXTLINK FORMS and press the Menu/Select button. 4. Press or to display the desired message and press the Menu/Select button. 5. Enter text into blank field(s) (up to eight alphanumeric characters) and press the NEXT soft key. 6. Select SEND to send the message. Select CHG CALLEE to change the destination for the message. Select TOD QUERY to get the time of day. 66 14221-1800-2000 5.17.3 View Received Messages When the 1. Press the Menu/Select button to access the main menu. icon appears on the idle display, there are Radio TextLink messages waiting to be read. 2. Press or to display the MESSAGES menu. 3. Press or to highlight TEXTLINK MAILBOX and press the Menu/Select button. From the mailbox, select OPTIONS to delete messages, view details of messages, and reply to messages. 5.18 FAULTS/ALERTS is displayed on the idle display when there is a fault. To view and clear faults/alerts:

1. Press the Menu/Select button to access the main menu. 2. Press or to display the MESSAGES menu. 3. Press or to highlight FAULTS/ALERTS and press the Menu/Select button. 4. Fault messages are displayed. Press or to highlight the desired fault. Press the OPTIONS soft key delete faults. Press the DETAILS soft key to view details for the highlighted fault. 5. Possible faults include:

BATTERY FAULT- Replace battery. EEPROM FAULT - Contact Harris. RF FAULT - Contact Harris. OVERCURRENT - Check antenna and antenna connection. Try replacing antenna. INVALID SYSTEM - Feature not installed. CHANNEL FAULT - Channel frequency programmed is not valid for this radio. 6. If you view but do not delete the fault, the alert icon goes away on the idle display. Contact Harris for assistance diagnosing a fault. NOTE 67 14221-1800-2000 5.19 TONE ENCODE Tone Encode is a generic tone encoding scheme for call identification when transmitting on a conventional system. It supports generic user-definable tone encode (up to 15 tones), Type 99 (up to 2 tones) and 5/1 Tone (up to 5 tones) encoding formats. Tone encoding schemes are used to transmit calls to one or more target radios that have been programmed with the correct tone decode sequence. When the receiving radio detects its tone decode sequence, it unmutes on the call. 1. Press the Menu/Select button to access the main menu. 2. Press or to display the CALL menu. 3. Press or to highlight TONE ENCODE and press the Menu/Select button. 4. Select the desired Tone Encode option from the list. 68 14221-1800-2000 5.20 ENCRYPTION 5.20.1 Create and Load Keys Refer to the following documentation for advanced programming and setup instructions:

Harris OTAR Overview Manual - MM-008069-001 Network Key Manager Installation and Configuration Manual - MM-008070-001 Harris UAS Key Management Application Manual - MM-008068-001 Harris Key Manager Key Admin Overview and Operation Manual - MM1000019423 Harris Key Manager Key Loader Overview and Operation Manual - MM1000019424 Motorola KVL 3000 Plus Key Variable Loader (KVL) User's Guide Motorola KVL 4000 Key Variable Loader (KVL) User's Guide 5.20.2 Zeroize Keys from Radio It may be necessary to remove keys because of compromise or expiration. 1. Press the Menu/Select button to access the main menu. 2. Press or to display the SECURITY menu. 3. Press or highlight ZEROIZE KEYS and press the Menu/Select button. 4. Press or to highlight YES and press the Menu/Select button to remove the keys. This will also remove the keysets. 5. Select OK. 5.20.3 Protected Keys The Protected Keys feature transfers P25 Voice Keys, from Harris Key Loader to the radio, that have been wrapped (AES) or encrypted (DES) with Key Protection Keys (KPKs). KPKs are nothing more than unprotected Key Encryption Keys (KEKs). The KPKs need to be loaded into the radio before the Protected Keys are loaded. Once loaded into the radio, the KPKs will be used to unwrap (AES) or decrypt

(DES) the Protected Keys. 69 14221-1800-2000 5.20.4 Global Encryption Global Encryption can be enabled when encryption keys are loaded on the radio and the selected Zone/System is encrypted. When Global Encryption is enabled on the radio, Global Key is used for all encrypted transmissions until:

Global Encryption is disabled. A new mission fill is activated. The active keyset is changed. The system is changed. Global Encryption behavior is available on all channels that support encrypted communications. 1. Press the Menu/Select button to access the main menu. 2. Press or to display the SECURITY menu. 3. Press or to highlight GLOBAL ENCRYPTION. Press the Menu/Select button to toggle ENABLED. 4. Press or to highlight the key and press the Menu/Select button. 5. To change the selected global key, press or to highlight GLOBAL KEY on the SECURITY menu. Press the Menu/Select key. 6. Press or to highlight the global key and press the Menu/Select button. 7. RPM2 allows Key Numbers to be given Key Names. 8. The optional global key icon is displayed on the main display. 5.20.5 Select Keyset 1. Press the Menu/Select button to access the main menu. 2. Press or to display the SECURITY menu. 3. Press or to select ACTIVE KEYSET. Press the Menu/Select button to toggle to the inactive keyset. 5.20.6 View Key List 1. Press the Menu/Select button to access the main menu. 2. Press or to display the SECURITY menu. 3. Press or to select KEY LIST and press the Menu/Select button. 4. The available key lists are displayed. 70 14221-1800-2000 5.20.7 OTAR Configuration OTAR is the over-the-air-rekeying from a KMF and must be enabled for the digital only channel using RPM2. For OTAR operation, the appropriate KEKs must be loaded into the radio using the Harris Key Loader or a KVL device. The KMF Configuration must include the RSI of the KMF and the appropriate Message Number Period. 1. Press the Menu/Select button to access the main menu. 2. Press or to display the SECURITY menu. 3. Press or to highlight OTAR and press ENABLED/DISABLED. the Menu/Select button to toggle 4. Press or to select OTAR REKEY and press the Menu/Select button to request that the KMF updates the keys in the radio. OTAR REKEY is only enabled if the radio has successfully registered for data operations. NOTE 71 14221-1800-2000 6. PROGRAMMING This section provides information on front panel programming. Programming can also be accomplished by creating a plan using a computer with RPM2 installed. 6.1 PROGRAMMING VIA RPM2 Radio Personality Manager (RPM2) is used for the bulk of programming the XL-200P. With RPM2, you can fully program the XL-200P using cable 12082-0410-A1. Removing power during radio programming, or programming the radio with low battery power could corrupt installation of firmware. CAUTION NOTE Ensure that the radio is turned off before connecting the programming cable. After the cable is connected, then power on the radio. 6.2 EDIT CHANNEL (ANALOG AND P25 CONVENTIONAL ONLY) Channels can be edited from the Channel Information (CH INFO) menu display. Most of the displayed channel parameters can be modified here. Channel edits persist across a power cycle. Loading a personality clears any channel edits. Available parameters vary depending on whether the channel is a P25 or analog channel. 1. From the main display, press to access the CH INFO screen. 2. Press or to scroll through the programmed channel settings. 3. Press the EDIT soft key. Only authorized users should attempt channel editing. CAUTION 4. Enter the password programmed via RPM2. You do not have to re-enter the password until you power cycle the radio. 5. Press the ENTER soft key. 6. Highlight and select the parameter to edit. For P25 channels, modify remaining channel settings:

CHANNEL NAME - Channel name. Up to 16 alphanumeric characters are allowed. RX FREQUENCY - Receive frequency. Note that if the new frequency is invalid, the display reverts to the old frequency (Table 6-1). TX FREQUENCY - Transmit frequency. TX POWER Transmit power. Toggle between LOW and HIGH. 72 14221-1800-2000 TALKGROUP Select a talkgroup for the channel. Talkgroup name cannot be set here. RX NAC - Network Access Code (NAC) radio uses for Normal squelch in receive. TX NAC - NAC radio transmits to break Normal squelch on receiving radio. P25 SQUELCH - Select type the radio uses in receive. Select NORMAL, SELECTIVE, or MONITOR. RX CHAN GUARD Squelch type radio uses in receive. Select Noise, CTCSS, or CDCSS. For a digital channel, the RX CHAN GUARD is used to receive from a Conventional analog channel that is on the same frequency and uses the selected Channel Guard. RX CODE - Code radio looks to unmute the speaker on the receiving radio when CDCSS squelch is used in conventional mode. RX TONE - Tone radio looks to unmute the speaker on the receiving radio when CTCSS squelch is used in conventional mode. 7. For analog channel, modify remaining channel settings:

CHANNEL NAME - Channel name. Up to 16 alphanumeric characters are allowed. TX FREQUENCY - Transmit frequency. TX POWER - Transmit power. Toggle between HIGH and LOW. RX CHAN GUARD - Squelch type radio uses in receive. Select Noise, CTCSS, or CDCSS. RX TONE - Tone radio uses to break selective squelch on receiving radio. This is available when RX squelch is set to CTCSS. RX CODE - Code radio uses to break selective squelch on receiving radio. This is available when RX squelch is set to CDCSS. RX CHAN GUARD is not available on this screen if it was enabled from the C menu as per Section 4.21. NOTE TX CHAN GUARD - Squelch type radio uses in transmit. Select None, CTCSS, or CDCSS. TX TONE - Tone sent by transmitting radio to allow receiving radio to unmute when CTCSS squelch is used in conventional mode. TX CODE - Code sent by transmitting radio to allow receiving radio to unmute when CDCSS squelch is used in conventional mode. TX CHAN GUARD is not available on this screen if it was enabled from the C menu as per Section 4.21. NOTE 8. An asterisk is displayed in front of the CHANNEL label on the main display when a channel has been edited. The asterisk is NOT shown for TX Power or Talkgroup changes. NOTE When the only item edited is the TX or RX CHAN GUARD values, and then CHAN GUARD edit is Disabled, the asterisk goes away and the channel is no longer considered edited. This is the only editable item for which this is true. Table 6-1: Valid Frequencies 73 14221-1800-2000 FREQUENCY RANGE FREQUENCY RESOLUTION 136 - 174 MHz 380 - 520 MHz 762 - 870 MHz 2500, 5000, or 6250 Hz 2500, 5000, or 6250 Hz 6250 kHz 6.3 OTAP The XL-200P supports Over-the-Air-Programming (OTAP) via ProFile Manager. RPM2 creates, modifies and stores personality information while ProFile Manager delivers the personality over the network to the desired radios. ProFile Manager also contains the ability to read personality information over-the-air and save the files, so that RPM2 can modify the information if necessary. You can interrupt the programming process, if necessary, by depressing the Push-to-Talk (PTT) button or declaring an emergency. Once a radio personality update is successfully completed, the radio automatically resets itself, switches to the new personality, and returns to normal operation. For more information on using ProFile Manager, refer to software release notes AE/LZT 123 3263/1. 6.4 PROGRAMMABLE BUTTONS AND SWITCHES 6.4.1 Programmable Buttons Press while on the main display to view the functions assigned to the programmable buttons. The programmable buttons are programmed using RPM2. A delay of 0 to 10 seconds can be defined in RPM2 for the programmable buttons. Table 6-2 lists and describes the functions that can be programmed to the buttons:

FUNCTION No Operation Monitor Toggle Monitor/Clear Voice Playback Lock Keypad Nuisance Delete System Up System Down System Up Wrap System Down Wrap Zone Up Zone Down Table 6-2: Programmable Button Options DESCRIPTION Toggles Monitor On/Off. Temporarily turn off selected squelch to monitor for traffic that may not normally break squelch. Also, press this button followed by the emergency button to clear an emergency. Accesses the AUDIO PLAYBACK menu. See Section 4.26. Locks the DTMF keypad, programmable function keys and navigation keys. Performs a Nuisance Delete. See Section 4.30 for more information. Scrolls up through the list of available systems, stopping at the top of the list. Scrolls down through the list of available systems, stopping when the end of the list is reached. Scrolls up through the list of available systems, wrapping to the end when the beginning of the list is reached. Scrolls down through the list of available systems, wrapping to the top when the bottom of the list is reached. Scrolls up through the list of available mixed system zones, stopping at the top of the list. If no mixed system zones are defined, or there is only one, the user will hear a deny tone when the button is pressed. Scrolls down through the list of available mixed system zones, stopping when the end of the list is reached. If no mixed system zones are defined, or there is only one, the user will hear a deny tone when the button is pressed. 74 FUNCTION Zone Up Wrap Zone Down Wrap 14221-1800-2000 DESCRIPTION Scrolls up through the list of available mixed system zones, wrapping to the end when the beginning of the list is reached. If no mixed system zones are defined, or there is only one, the user will hear a deny tone when the button is pressed. Scrolls down through the list of available mixed system zones, wrapping to the top when the bottom of the list is reached. If no mixed system zones are defined, or there is only one, the user will hear a deny tone when the button is pressed. Select the channel/group bank. If your system has more than 64 channels, this allows you to select a channel group with channels 65 to 127, 128 to 191, etc. Drop or terminate any group call that the radio receives. Sends a preconfigured status. See Section 5.15 for more information. Sends a preconfigured message. See Section 5.16 for more information. Toggle TX Power between LOW and HIGH. Enable/disable scan. Channel/Group Bank Select Drop Call Send Status Send Message TX Power High/Low Scan Enable Secure Enable Toggle Toggles Encryption Mode On/Off. See Sections 4.19 and 5.20 for information on Home Adjust Squelch Front Backlight Top Orient Top Backlight Flashlight Mode Speaker Mute Toggle Talkaround Voice Announce Channel Guard Override Individual Call OTAR Rekey GPS SA Info Site Roaming Profile Toggle Numeric Channel Entry Encryption. Goes to home channel. Allows the user to adjust the analog squelch level. Toggles front displays backlight On/Off/Momentary. Toggles Top Display Front/Back. Toggles the top displays backlight On/Off/Momentary. Press and hold to turn on the front and top display backlights. Release the button to turn off both displays. Toggles Speaker Muted/Unmuted. Toggles Talkaround On/Off. See Section 4.22. Enable/disable Voice Annunciation. See Section 4.18 Allow user to pick a different Channel Guard setting for the current channel. Initiate an Individual Call. Initiate an OTAR rekey. See Section 5.20.7. Display GPS Situational Awareness (SA) screen. Enable/disable Site roaming. Site Roaming allows the radio to roam to another site. Toggles between the currently active profile (if one has been selected) and no profile. Allows number channel entry. 6.4.2 Programmable A/B (/O) Switch The programmable A/B switch can be programmed for multiple functions, including:

Table 6-3: Programmable /O Switch Options FUNCTION Clear/Secure Scan Talkaround Keypad Lock/Unlock TX Enable/Disable Enable/disable encryption. Turn scan operation on/off. Enable/disable talkaround. Locks/unlocks the keypad. Enables/Disables transmit. DESCRIPTION 75 14221-1800-2000 6.4.3 Programmable A/B/C/D Switch Sections 6.4.3.1 and 6.4.3.2 describe the various functions that can be programmed to the A/B/C/D switch. 6.4.3.1 Single-Instance Features Single-instance features can only be assigned to one switch position at a time. If one of these features is programmed to the A/B/C/D switch, other means of accessing that feature are disabled (i.e., two-position switch, programmable buttons, call menu, etc.). FUNCTION No Function Talkaround Scan TX Power High TX Power Low Keypad Lock Radio Lock Table 6-4: Single-Instance Features DESCRIPTION No function programmed to switch. See Section 4.22. Enables scanning. Sets transmission power level to High. Changing to a Tx Power High position overrides the current personality or user setting for TX Power. Changing from a Tx Power High position restores the personality-configured Tx Power Level. Sets transmission power level to Low. Changing to a Tx Power Low position overrides the current personality or user setting for TX Power. Changing from a Tx Power Low position restores the personality-configured Tx Power Level. Locks DTMF, programmable, and navigation soft keys. When set, prevents the radio software from responding to the following physical inputs on the radio:

Volume Knob Change (power off is not prevented) Channel Knob Side User-Programmable Buttons and Keypad (DTMF, programmable, and 2-Position Switch navigation/soft keys) NOTE: Exception is the emergency button and if any key is programmed for Monitor/Clear, it can be used with the emergency button to clear emergency, if so programmed. Selects channels 1-16 in position A; 17-32 in position B; 33-48 in position C; and 49-64 in position D. Channel Bank NOTE If Channel Bank is selected for any single position, all 4 positions (A, B, C, and D) will be set to Channel Bank. 76 14221-1800-2000 Indexed Features 6.4.3.2 These features can be assigned to any number of positions as long as each index value selected for it is unique across multiple assignments of the same feature; for example, you cannot assign a Zone with a particular index (e.g., ZONE A) to both positions A and B. FUNCTION DESCRIPTION Table 6-5: Indexed Features Zone Selection Sets to the Zone index value. When setting the A/B/C/D switch to an indexed zone assigned position, the radio sets, but does not hold, that zone. This has the resulting effects:

This sets the channel knob to be zone-based system/channel selection just like selecting a zone from the main Zone menu or ramping up/down using the side user-programmable buttons. If a user then changes to a different system or zone via another method (menu, button, etc.), it will override the Zone selection switch setting accordingly and not require it to remain in the zone where the switch assignment is set. When changing away from a Zone assigned position, no actions/changes will be taken by the radio. Sets to the System index value. When setting the A/B/C/D switch to an indexed System assigned position, the radio sets, but does not hold, that System. This has the resulting effects:

This sets the channel knob to be system-based channel selection, just like selecting a system from the main Zone menu or ramping up/down using the side user-programmable buttons. If a user then changes to a different system or zone via another method (menu, button, etc.), it will override the System selection switch setting accordingly and not require it to remain in the system where the switch assignment is set. System Selection When changing away from a System assigned position, no actions/changes will be taken by the radio. 6.5 PROGRAMMABLE ICONS Top display 6.5.1 The top display has space for up to seven configurable icons, which can be programmed to display any of the following:

Blank Signal Strength Battery Status Bluetooth enabled Encryption enabled Scan/Vote Scan enabled Talkaround enabled Emergency mode active The radio can be programmed to change the color of the top display backlight relative to the currently selected channel/group. The backlight remains the color programmed for the currently selected channel/group except during an emergency, in which case the color changes to orange. 77 14221-1800-2000 Front display 6.5.2 The front display has space for up to 10 configurable icons, which can be programmed to display any of the following:

Blank Signal Strength Battery Status Bluetooth enabled Encryption enabled Global Encryption Talkaround enabled TX Disabled Tones Disabled PTT Disabled Speaker Muted Monitor OTAR Status (Disabled, Registering, Registered, Rekeying) TX Power level (Low/High/RX Only) GPS Status VDOC Failsoft Data Status (TX/RX) Alert(s) RX Mail Noise Cancellation Enabled Type 99 Enabled Conventional Site Status (Unregistered/Registered) 78 14221-1800-2000 7. REFERENCE 7.1 MARINE FREQUENCIES Refer to Table 7-1: Marine Frequencies for a list of maritime frequencies per United States Coast Guard

(USCG), National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration (NOAA), and Canadian Department Fisheries and Oceans, August 2009:

United States (US) International (Intl) Canada (CA) Table 7-1: Marine Frequencies CHANNEL US INTL CA 1a 5a 6 7a 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4a 5a 6 7a 8 9 FREQUENCY SHIP

(MHZ) T: 156.05 R: 160.65 T/R:

156.05 T: 156.10 R: 160.70 T: 156.15 R: 160.75 T: 156.20 R: 160.80 T/R:

156.20 T: 156.25 R: 160.85 T/R:

156.25 T/R:

156.30 SHORE

(MHZ) T: 160.65 R: 156.05 T/R:

156.05 T: 160.70 R: 156.10 T: 160.75 R: 156.15 T: 160.80 R: 156.20 T/R:

156.20 T: 160.85 R: 156.25 T/R:

156.25 T/R:

156.30 T: 156.35 R: 160.95 T/R:

156.35 T/R:

156.40 T: 160.95 R: 156.35 T/R:

156.35 T/R:

156.40 T/R:

156.45 T/R:

156.45 CHANNEL USAGE International: Public Correspondence, Port Operations US: Port Operations and Commercial, Vessel Traffic Service (VTS). New Orleans/Lower Mississippi area. International: Public Correspondence, Port Operations International: Public Correspondence, Port Operations International: Public Correspondence, Port Operations Canada: Department Fisheries Ocean (DFO)/Canadian Coast Guard only in British Columbia coast area. Commercial fishing in east coast area International: Public Correspondence, Port Operations US: Port Operations or VTS in Houston, New Orleans and Seattle areas. US: Intership Safety International: Intership Canada: May be used for search and rescue communications between ships and aircraft. International: Public Correspondence, Port Operations US: Commercial US: Commercial (Intership only) International: Intership Canada: Also assigned for intership in the Lake Winnipeg area. US: Boater Calling. Commercial and Non-Commercial. International: Intership, Port Operations Canada: Commercial - British Columbia coast area. May be used to communicate with aircraft and helicopters in predominantly maritime support operations. 79 14221-1800-2000 CHANNEL US INTL CA 10 10 10 FREQUENCY SHIP

(MHZ) SHORE

(MHZ) T/R:

156.50 T/R:

156.50 11 11 11 T/R:

156.55 T/R:

156.55 12 12 12 T/R:

156.60 T/R:

156.60 13 13 13 T/R:

156.65 T/R:

156.65 14 14 14 T/R:

156.70 T/R:

156.70 15 15 15 T/R:

156.75 T/R:

156.75 16 16 16 T/R:

156.80 T/R:

156.80 17 17 17 T/R:

156.85 T/R:

156.85 18 T: 156.90 R: 161.50 18a 18a T/R:

156.90 T: 156.95 R: 161.55*

19 19a 19a T/R:

156.95 T: 161.50 R: 156.90 T/R:

156.90 T: 161.55*

R: 156.95 T/R:

156.95 20 20 20 T: 157.00 R: 161.60 T: 161.60 R: 157.00 80 CHANNEL USAGE US: Commercial International: Intership, Port Operations Canada: Commercial - British Columbia coast area. May also be used for communications with aircraft engaged in coordinated search and rescue and antipollution operations. US: Commercial. VTS in selected areas. International: Port Operations Canada: VTS - British Columbia coast area. Also used for pilotage purposes. US: Port Operations. VTS in selected areas. International: Port Operations Canada: VTS - British Columbia coast area. Also used for pilotage purposes. US: Intership Navigation Safety (Bridge-to-bridge). Ships >20m length maintain a listening watch on this channel in US waters. International: Intership, Port Operations Canada: VTS - British Columbia coast area. Also used for pilotage purposes. US: Port Operations. VTS in selected areas. International: Port Operations Canada: VTS - British Columbia coast area. Also used for pilotage purposes. US: Environmental (Receive only). Used by Class C Emergency Position-

Indicating Radio Beacons (EPIRBs). International: Intership, Port Operations Canada: Port operations and Ship Movement - British Columbia coast area. All operations limited to 1-watt maximum power. May also be used for on-

board communications. US: International Distress, Safety and Calling. Ships required to carry radio, US Coast Guard (USCG), and most coast stations maintain a listening watch on this channel. International: International Distress, Safety and Calling Canada: International Distress, Safety and Calling US: State Control International: Intership, Port Operations Canada: Port operations and Ship Movement - British Columbia coast area. All operations limited to 1 watt maximum power. May also be used for on-

board communications. International: Public Correspondence, Port Operations US: Commercial Canada: Towing - British Columbia coast area. International: Public Correspondence, Port Operations US: Commercial Canada: DFO/Canadian Coast Guard. Pacific Pilots - British Columbia coast area. US: Port Operations (Duplex) International: Public Correspondence, Port Operations Canada: Port operations only with 1 watt maximum power. 14221-1800-2000 FREQUENCY CHANNEL US INTL CA 20a 21 SHIP

(MHZ) T/R:

157.00 T: 157.05 R: 161.65*

21a 21a T/R:

157.05

- -

21b 22 T: 157.10 R: 161.70 22a 22a T/R:

157.10 23 23 23a 24 24 25 25 23b 24 25 T: 157.15 R: 161.75 T/R:

157.15

- -

T: 157.20 R: 161.80 T: 157.25 R: 161.85 25b 26 26 27 27 28 28 60 61 61a 26 27 28 28b 60 T: 157.30 R: 161.90 T: 157.35 R: 161.95 T: 157.40 R: 162.00

- -

T: 156.025 R: 160.625 T: 156.075 R: 160.675 61a T/R:

156.075 T: 156.125 R: 160.725 62 62a T/R:

156.125 SHORE

(MHZ) T/R:

157.00 T: 161.65*

R: 157.05 T/R:

157.05 T/R:

161.65 T: 161.70 R: 157.10 T/R:

157.10 T: 161.75 R: 157.15 T/R:

157.15 T/R:

161.75 T: 161.80 R: 157.20 T: 161.85 R: 157.25 T/R:

161.85 T: 161.90 R: 157.30 T: 161.95 R: 157.35 T: 162.00 R: 157.40 T/R:

162.00 T: 160.625 R: 156.025 T: 160.675 R: 156.075 T/R:

156.075 T: 160.725 R: 156.125 T/R:

156.125 CHANNEL USAGE US: Port Operations International: Public Correspondence, Port Operations US: US Coast Guard only Canada: DFO/Canadian Coast Guard only. International: Public Correspondence, Port Operations US: Coast Guard Liaison and Maritime Safety Information Broadcasts. Broadcasts announced on channel 16. Canada: For communications between Canadian Coast Guard and non-

Canadian Coast Guard stations only. International: Public Correspondence, Port Operations US: US Coast Guard only Canada: Continuous Marine Broadcast (CMB) service. US: Public Correspondence (Marine Operator) International: Public Correspondence, Port Operations US: Public Correspondence (Marine Operator) International: Public Correspondence, Port Operations Canada: Also assigned for operations in the Lake Winnipeg area. US: Public Correspondence (Marine Operator) International: Public Correspondence, Port Operations US: Public Correspondence (Marine Operator) International: Public Correspondence, Port Operations US: Public Correspondence (Marine Operator) International: Public Correspondence, Port Operations Canada: Continuous Marine Broadcast (CMB) service. International: Public Correspondence, Port Operations International: Public Correspondence, Port Operations Canada: DFO/Canadian Coast Guard only in British Columbia coast area. International: Public Correspondence, Port Operations Canada: DFO/Canadian Coast Guard only in British Columbia coast area. 81 14221-1800-2000 CHANNEL US INTL CA 63 FREQUENCY SHIP

(MHZ) T: 156.175 R: 160.775 63a 63a T/R:

156.175 64 64 T: 156.225 R: 160.825 64a 64a T/R:

156.225 T: 156.275 R: 160.875 65 65a 65a T/R:

156.275 SHORE

(MHZ) T: 160.775 R: 156.175 T/R:

156.175 T: 160.825 R: 156.225 T/R:

156.225 T: 160.875 R: 156.225 T/R:

156.275 66 T: 156.325 R: 160.925 66a 66a T/R:

156.325 T: 160.925 R: 156.325 T/R:

156.325 67 67 67 T/R:

156.375 T/R:

156.375 68 68 68 T/R:

156.425 T/R:

156.425 69 69 69 T/R:

156.475 T/R:

156.475 70 70 70 T/R:

156.525 T/R:

156.525 71 71 71 T/R:

156.575 T/R:

156.575 72 72 72 T/R:

156.625 T/R:

156.625 82 CHANNEL USAGE International: Public Correspondence, Port Operations US: Port Operations and Commercial, VTS. New Orleans/Lower Mississippi area. Canada: Tow Boats - British Columbia coast area. International: Public Correspondence, Port Operations Canada: Commercial fishing only. International: Public Correspondence, Port Operations US: Port Operations Canada: Search and rescue and antipollution operations on the Great Lakes. Towing on the Pacific Coast. Port operations only in the St. Lawrence River areas with 1 watt maximum power. Intership in inland Manitoba, Saskatchewan, and Alberta areas. International: Public Correspondence, Port Operations US: Port Operations Canada: Port operations only in the St. Lawrence River/Great Lakes areas with 1 watt maximum power. 1 watt marina channel - British Columbia coast area. US: Commercial. Used for Bridge-to-bridge communications in lower Miss. River. Intership only. International: Intership, Port Operations Canada: May also be used for communications with aircraft engaged in coordinated search and rescue and antipollution operations. Commercial fishing only in east coast and inland Manitoba, Saskatchewan, and Alberta areas. Pleasure craft - British Columbia coast area. US: Non-Commercial International: Port Operations Canada: For marinas, yacht clubs and pleasure craft. US: Non-Commercial International: Intership, Port Operations Canada: Commercial fishing only - east coast area. Pleasure craft - British Columbia coast area. US: Digital Selective Calling (voice communications not allowed) International: Digital selective calling for distress, safety and calling Canada: Digital selective calling for distress, safety and calling US: Non-Commercial International: Port Operations Canada: Ship Movement - British Columbia coast area. Marinas and yacht clubs - east coast and on Lake Winnipeg. US: Non-Commercial (Intership only) International: Intership Canada: May be used to communicate with aircraft and helicopters in predominantly maritime support operations. Pleasure craft - British Columbia coast area 14221-1800-2000 CHANNEL US INTL CA 73 73 73 FREQUENCY SHIP

(MHZ) SHORE

(MHZ) T/R:

156.675 T/R:

156.675 74 74 74 T/R:

156.725 T/R:

156.725 75 75 75 T/R:

156.775 T/R:

156.775 76 76 76 T/R:

156.825 T/R:

156.825 77 77 77 T/R:

156.875 T/R:

156.875 78 T: 156.925 R: 161.525 78a 78a T/R:

79 79a 79a T/R:

80 80a 80a T/R:

81 81a 81a T/R:

82 82a 82a T/R:

83 156.925 T: 156.975 R: 161.575 156.975 T: 157.025 R: 161.625 157.025 T: 157.075 R: 161.675 157.075 T: 157.125 R: 161.725 157.125 T: 157.175 R: 161.775 83a 83a T/R:

157.175

- -

83b T: 161.525 R: 156.925 T/R:

156.925 T: 161.575 R: 156.975 T/R:

156.975 T: 161.625 R: 157.025 T/R:

157.025 T: 161.675 R: 157.075 T/R:

157.075 T: 161.725 R: 157.125 T/R:

157.125 T: 161.775 R: 157.175 T/R:

157.175 T/R:

161.775 CHANNEL USAGE US: Port Operations International: Intership, Port Operations Canada: May also be used for communications with aircraft engaged in coordinated search and rescue and antipollution operations. Commercial fishing only in east coast and inland Manitoba, Saskatchewan, and Alberta areas. US: Port Operations International: Port Operations Canada: VTS and Ship Movement British Columbia coast area. International: Port Operations Canada: Simplex port operation, ship movement and navigation related communication only. 1 watt maximum. International: Port Operations Canada: Simplex port operation, ship movement and navigation related communication only. 1 watt maximum. US: Port Operations (Intership only) International: Intership Canada: Pilotage - British Columbia coast area; 25 watts. Port operations only in the St. Lawrence River/Great Lakes areas with 1 watt maximum power. International: Public Correspondence, Port Operations US: Non-Commercial Canada: Fishing Industry - British Columbia coast area. International: Public Correspondence, Port Operations US: Commercial. Non-Commercial in Great Lakes only Canada: Fishing Industry - British Columbia coast area. International: Public Correspondence, Port Operations US: Commercial. Non-Commercial in Great Lakes only Canada: Fishing Industry - British Columbia coast area. International: Public Correspondence, Port Operations US: US Government only - Environmental protection operations Canada: DFO/Canadian Coast Guard use only. International: Public Correspondence, Port Operations US: US. Government only Canada: DFO/Canadian Coast Guard use only. International: Public Correspondence, Port Operations US: US Coast Guard only Canada: DFO/Canadian Coast Guard and other Government agencies. 83 14221-1800-2000 FREQUENCY SHIP

(MHZ) SHORE

(MHZ) T: 157.225 R: 161.825 T: 157.275 R: 161.875 T: 157.325 R: 161.925 T: 157.375 R: 161.975 T: 161.825 R: 157.225 T: 161.875 R: 157.275 T: 161.925 R: 157.325 T: 161.975 R: 157.375 CHANNEL US INTL CA 84 84 85 85 86 86 87 87 84 85 86 87 87b T/R:

T/R:

157.375 161.975 T: 157.425 R: 162.025 88 88 87a 88a WX1 WX2 WX3 WX4 WX5 WX6 WX7 T/R:

157.425 88b T/R:

162.025 WX1 WX2 WX3 CHANNEL USAGE US: Public Correspondence (Marine Operator) International: Public Correspondence, Port Operations US: Public Correspondence (Marine Operator) International: Public Correspondence, Port Operations US: Public Correspondence (Marine Operator) International: Public Correspondence, Port Operations US: Automatic Identification System duplex repeater International: Port Operations Canada: Port operation and ship movement - east coast area. Pleasure craft - British Columbia coast area. US: Public Correspondence (Marine Operator) Canada: Automatic Ship Identification and Surveillance System. US: Commercial, Intership only. International: Port Operations Canada: Port operation and ship movement - British Columbia coast area. US: Commercial, Intership only. Canada: Automatic Ship Identification and Surveillance System. T/R:

157.375 T/R:

161.975 T: 162.025 R: 157.425 T/R:

157.425 T/R:

162.025 R: 162.55 R: 162.4 R: 162.475 R: 162.425 R: 162.45 R: 162.5 R: 162.525 7.2 NARROWBANDING The FCC has mandated that all public safety radios manufactured after January 1, 2013 comply with narrowbanding restrictions (see http://transition.fcc.gov/pshs/public-safetyspectrum/narrowbanding.html for more information). Radios manufactured after the above date will comply with these restrictions. Existing radio personalities that contain frequencies that violate the new FCC rules will cause an invalid channel error indication on the radio display. The user will need to change the radio personality to comply with the new rules. Note that there are multiple exceptions to the narrowbanding mandate, including the Marine Frequencies listed in Section 7.1. 84 8. GLOSSARY 14221-1800-2000 AES AES-256 AMBE+2 ANSI ASCII C CA CDCSS CH INFO CKR CMB CTCSS DES DES-OFB DFO DMS

-A-

Advanced Encryption Standard Advanced Encryption Standard, 256-bit Advanced Multi-Band Excitation implementation 2 American National Standards Institute American Standard Code for Information Interchange

-B-

-C-

Celsius Canada Continuous Digital Coded Squelch System Channel Information Common Key References Continuous Marine Broadcast Continuous Tone Coded Squelch System

-D-

Digital Encryption Standard Digital Encryption Standard Output Feedback Department Fisheries Ocean Degrees Minutes Seconds

-E-

EPIRB Emergency Position-Indicating Radio Beacons F FCC FM Fahrenheit Federal Communications Commission Frequency Modulation

-F-

GHz GEOTRANS Geographic Translator GPS Giga (109) Hertz Global Positioning System Hertz Harris Key Loader

-G-

-H-

-I-

Hz HKL ID IEEE INTL Identification Institute of Electrical & Electronics Engineers International

-J-

85 14221-1800-2000 KEK kHz KID KMF KMS KS KVL

-K-

Key Encryption Key kilo (103) Hertz Key Identification Key Management Facility Key Management System Key Set Key Variable Loader (Motorola KVL Device)

-L-

LAT/LONG DMS LED Li-ION Latitude/Longitude Degrees Minutes Seconds Light Emitting Diode Lithium-ION Megahertz Millimeter Mobile Radio milli (10-3) seconds

-M-

-N-

Network Access Code Nickel Metal Hydride National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration

-O-

Office of Engineering and Technology Over The Air Rekey Project 25 Position Priority (Channel) Push-to-Talk

-P-

-Q-

-R-

Radio Frequency Radio Personality Manager 2 Radio Set Identifier Remote Speaker Microphone Receive Situational Awareness Subminiature version A

-S-

-T-

Telecommunications Industry Association Transmit MHz mm MR ms NAC Ni-MH NOAA OET OTAR P25 POS PRI PTT RF RPM2 RSI RSM RX SA SMA TIA TX 86 14221-1800-2000 UHF UKEK US USCG UTC UTM VDC VHF VIDA VTS

-U-

Ultra High Frequency Unique Key Encryption Key United States United States Coast Guard Universal Time Coordinated Universal Transverse Mercator

-V-

Volts, Direct Current Very High Frequency Voice Interoperability Data Access Vessel Traffic Service

-W-

WEEE Waste from Electric and Electronic Equipment

-X-

-Y-

-Z-

87 14221-1800-2000 9. BASIC TROUBLESHOOTING 9.1 ERROR MESSAGES This section provides a list of error messages, as well as possible causes and solutions. SCREEN TEXT REASON DELETE NOT ALLOWED Nuisance delete not allowed on current channel. EMERGENCY ACTIVE SCAN DISABLED OTAR REKEY FAILED OTAR ZEROIZE FAILED NO OTAR KEK LOADED INVALID OTAR KEYSETS INVALID KEYSTORE ZEROIZE NEEDED Top Level Display Cannot scan when transmitting an emergency. Self-explanatory OTAR configuration failed because keysets were improperly configured. RESOLUTION Requires new personality configuration (either Limited/Programmable scan lists or Keypad P1/P2 channels). Exit emergency to start scanning. Attempt OTAR operation again. Attempt OTAR operation again. Load valid KEK before attempting OTAR. Zeroize keys and reload KEK(s) before attempting OTAR. Corrupt key database. Zeroize database. SYNTH OUT OF LOCK DSP synthesizer out of lock. SYNTH OUT OF LOCK POWER CYCLE RADIO DSP synthesizer out of lock - unable to restore by reselecting channel. TEXTLINK SEND FAILED Failure to send a Radio TextLink message due to a data communication problem. PAIRING FAILED Bluetooth pairing failed. Channel will reselect automatically to attempt to obtain synth lock. Unable to obtain synthesizer lock. Power cycle radio and contact Harris if problem persists. Troubleshoot the data connection between the radio and site. Ping the radio to verify the data connection. Ensure device is discoverable and attempt to re-pair the device. PIN CODE MUST HAVE AT LEAST 4 DIGITS EDIT FAILED INVALID RX FREQUENCY INVALID TX FREQUENCY INVALID CODE The PIN entered is too short. Enter at least four digits. Unable to modify P25 Channel Entered Rx frequency is invalid. Entered Tx frequency is invalid. Power cycle and try again--

contact Harris if problem persists. Ensure frequency follows band spacing rules. Ensure frequency follows band spacing rules. Code entered is not a valid CDCSS code. Ensure code is valid. Bluetooth Pairing Screen Channel Edit Screen Personality List Screen NAME ALREADY EXISTS EMERGENCY ACTIVE FILL DISABLED The channel name is already used. Enter a new channel name. Cannot activate personalities when transmitting an emergency. Exit emergency to activate a new personality. 88 14221-1800-2000 SCREEN TEXT REASON RESOLUTION INSTALL NOT ALLOWED Error during install process. Install Operations EXTRACTION FAILED Extraction of compressed file failed. Personality In Progress Screen Security Menu Utilities Menu Channel Info Screen REMOVE FAILED Removal of existing software failed. PLAN FAILED Personality activation failed. ZEROIZE FAILED DSP could not zeroize. NO KEYS TO ZEROIZE Key database empty. INCORRECT PASSWORD INCORRECT PASSWORD Channel edit password invalid. Maintenance password invalid. Transfer the file again and reattempt install. Contact Harris if problem persists. Transfer file again and reattempt install. Contact Harris if problem persists. Attempt to install again and contact Harris if problem persists. Use RPM2 to ensure plan validity. Contact Harris if failures persist. DSP problem power cycle the radio and contact Harris if problem persists. Nothing to zeroize. Enter a valid maintenance password. Enter valid channel edit password. 9.2 OTAR ERRORS/INFORMATION WORKAROUNDS:

1. Zeroize. 2. Load proper KEK from the Harris Key Loader or Motorola KVL. IF RADIO INDICATES:

1. INVALID KEYSTORE ZEROIZE NEEDED:

This occurs if the radios keys were loaded by the Harris Key Loader followed by an attempt to load UKEKs with the Key Loader or keys with the Motorola KVL. Fix by performing workaround 1, followed by 2. 2. NO UKEK Displayed during a zeroize performed from the radio or a zeroize initiated from the KMF.

- Fix by performing workaround 2. 3. Zeroize Complete KMF has zeroized the radio.

- Fix by performing workaround 2. 4. Disabled OTAR Icon (red slash) OTAR is disabled while in scan, talkaround, emergency, and monitor.

- Fix by disabling these features. Icon will be corrected (no red slash). 5. Gray OTAR Icon (no red slash) OTAR has not registered with tower (Conventional or Trunked system).

- Fix by verifying proper frequencies.

-

If the radio is turned to the OTAR channel out of range of a conventional tower, and then comes in range after 3 minutes, fix by issuing an OTAR. Rekey, leaving and re-enter the OTAR channel. 89 14221-1800-2000 6. Green OTAR Icon OTAR is registered, all is well.

-

If update fails, verify you are in range of the tower and the KEK is correct. 7. Blue OTAR Icon OTAR is attempting to rekey.

-

If rekey fails, verify you are in range of the tower and the KEK is correct. 10. TECHNICAL ASSISTANCE The Technical Assistance Center's (TAC) resources are available to help with overall system operation, maintenance, upgrades and product support. TAC is the point of contact when answers are needed to technical questions. Product specialists, with detailed knowledge of product operation, maintenance and repair provide technical support via a toll-free (in North America) telephone number. Support is also available through mail, fax and e-mail. For more information about technical assistance services, contact your sales representative, or contact the Technical Assistance Center directly:

North America:

International:

Fax:

E-mail:

1-800-528-7711 1-434-385-2400 1-434-455-6712 PSPC_tac@harris.com 90 11. WARRANTY 14221-1800-2000 Please register this product within 10 days of purchase. Registration validates the warranty coverage, and enables Harris to contact you in case of any safety notifications issued for this product. Registration can be made on-line at the Customer Care center webpage:

http://www.pspc.harris.com/Service/Customerservice.aspx. While on the webpage, please review the applicable battery and/or product literature. warranty 91 14221-1800-2000 APPENDIX A WI-FI PROGRAMMING These instructions assume the user has a basic familiarity with Wi-Fi Networks, their configuration, and how to connect devices. If you are unfamiliar with the terms and/or procedures mentioned in these instructions, please contact your IT department for help before attempting to configure Wi-Fi programming. NOTE A.1 NETWORK CONFIGURATION In order to program the XL-200P over Wi-Fi, you need to have a wireless network available. This wireless network will be used by RPM2 and the radio for Wi-Fi functionality. RPM2 and the XL-

200P come with a default Wi-Fi configuration, but they can be customized to match an existing Wi-Fi configuration. For default operation, setup a wireless network (access point) as follows:

SSID (or networking name) is set to the radio default of harrisradios Password of password Encryption type of either WPA or WPA2 A.2 RADIO/RPM CONFIGURATION For default operation using the network as described in Section A.1, no special configuration of the radio or RPM is required. A.3 PC CONFIGURATION Configure the PC to connect to the same Wireless network as the radio. For Windows 7, this can be done through the Network and Sharing Center. A.4 CONNECTION 1. For default operation, power on radio while pressing and holding the bottom side and PTT buttons. This places the radio into Wi-Fi programming mode. A screen appears on the front panel indicating the radio is in Wi-Fi programming mode. 2. Start RPM2. 92 14221-1800-2000 3. Select the Connection tab (the one with the radio icon) and click the Wi-Fi connection button as shown below. You should see any radios that are in Wi-Fi mode appear. Make sure this button is selected to get into Wi-Fi discovery mode. Radios should start to appear in this area once RPM2 and the radio(s) are on the same network. A.5 PERSONAL/CUSTOM NETWORK CONFIGURATION 1. In order to use a wireless network with parameters that are different from the default configuration above, some configuration of RPM2 and the radio is required. In RPM2, create a new personality or open a personality previously created for the radio that you wish to program over Wi-Fi. 2. Navigate to the Network Configuration screen as shown in Figure 11-1. The default parameters as noted in Section A.4 should be shown. Figure 11-1: RPM2 Network Configuration Screen 93 14221-1800-2000 3. Change the parameters as needed to match the configuration of the network you are trying to use for Wi-Fi programming. 4. Reprogram the radio with this personality over USB and activate it. 5. You should now be able to connect to this radio over Wi-Fi following the procedure as outlined in Section A.4. In order to connect over Wi-Fi, the currently active personality MUST have the correct Wi-Fi parameters. Therefore, care must be taken that all personalities on a given radio have the correct Wi-Fi parameters for the desired network. Otherwise, activation of another personality on the radio will result in the inability to establish a Wi-Fi connection. NOTE 94 Public Safety and Professional Communications | www.pspc.harris.com 221 Jefferson Ridge Parkway | Lynchburg, VA USA 24501 | 1-800-528-7711 Product Safety Manual 14221-1800-2010 Mar/15 rate This booklet contains important safety information regarding specific absorption

(SAR) and RF exposure limits included in United States and international standards. Read the information in this booklet before operating your radio. XL-200P Series Portable Radios REV DATE

- Mar/15 DESCRIPTION Initial release. ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS The software contained in this device is copyrighted by Harris Corporation. Unpublished rights are reserved under the copyright laws of the United States. This device is made under license under one or more of the following US patents: 4,590,473; 4,636,791; 5,148,482;

5,185,796; 5,271,017; 5,377,229; 4,716,407; 4,972,460;

5,502,767; 5,146,497; 5,164,986; 5,185,795; 5,226,084;

5,247,579; 5,491,772; 5,517,511; 5,630,011; 5,649,050;

5,701,390; 5,715,365; 5,754,974; 5,826,222; 5,870,405;

6,161,089; and 6,199,037 B1. DVSI claims certain rights, including patent rights under aforementioned U.S. patents, and under other U.S. and foreign patents and patents pending. Any use of this software or technology requires a separate written license from DVSI. CREDITS Harris, EDACS, OpenSky, and assuredcommunications are registered trademarks and ProVoice is a trademark of Harris Corporation. RBRC and 1-800-8-BATTERY are registered trademarks of Rechargeable Battery Recycling Corporation. AMBE is a registered trademark and IMBE, AMBE+, and AMBE+2 are trademarks of Digital Voice Systems, Inc. All other product and brand names are trademarks, registered trademarks, or service marks of their respective holders. NOTICE The material contained herein is subject to U.S. export approval. No export or re-export is permitted without written approval from the U.S. Government. Rated: EAR99;

in accordance with U.S. Dept. of Commerce regulations 15CFR774, Export Administration Regulations. Information and descriptions contained herein are the property of Harris Corporation. Such information and descriptions may not be copied or reproduced by any means, or disseminated or distributed without the express prior written permission of Harris Corporation, PS&PC Division, 221 Jefferson Ridge Parkway, Lynchburg, VA 24501. This product conforms to the European Union WEEE Directive 2002/96/EC. Do not dispose of this product in a public landfill. This product should be taken to a recycling center at the end of its life. The voice coding technology embodied in this product is protected by intellectual property rights including patent rights, copyrights, and trade secrets of Digital Voice 2 14221-1800-2010 Systems, Inc. The user of this technology is explicitly prohibited from attempting to decompile, reverse engineer, or disassemble the Object Code, or in any other way convert the Object Code into human-readable form. Repairs to this equipment should be made only by an authorized service technician or facility designated by the supplier. Any repairs, alterations, or substitution of recommended parts made by the user to this equipment not approved by the manufacturer could void the users authority to operate the equipment in addition to the manufacturers warranty. This manual is published by Harris Corporation, without any warranty. Improvements and changes to this manual necessitated by typographical errors, information, or improvements to programs and/or equipment, may be made by Harris Corporation, at any time and without notice. Such changes will be incorporated into new editions of this manual. No part of this manual may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, including photocopying and recording, for any purpose, without the express written permission of Harris Corporation. Copyright 2015 Harris Corporation. inaccuracies of current 14221-1800-2010 3 TABLE OF CONTENTS Page SAFETY 1. REGULATORY AND SUR SUR 2. RENSEIGNEMENTS INFORMATION .................................. 5 1.1 SAFETY SYMBOL CONVENTIONS ... 5 1.2 SAFETY TRAINING INFORMATION . 6 1.3 REGULATORY APPROVALS ............. 9 1.4 OPERATING TIPS ................................. 9 LA RGLEMENTATION ET SCURIT

.............................................................. 13 2.1 CONVENTIONS SUR LES SYMBOLES DE SCURIT ..................................... 13 2.2 RENSEIGNEMENTS LA FORMATION SUR LA SCURIT .... 14 2.3 INTERFRENCE DES RADIOFRQUENCES ........................ 17 2.4 CONSEILS DUTILISATION ............. 17 3. OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES.............. 21 4. BATTERY PACKS .................................... 22 4.1 CONDITIONING NIMH BATTERY PACKS ................................................. 23 4.2 CONDITIONING LITHIUM BATTERY PACKS ................................................. 23 4.3 STORING LI-ION BATTERY PACKS 23 4.4 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION ......... 24 4.5 BATTERY DISPOSAL ........................ 24 5. TECHNICAL ASSISTANCE .................... 25 6. WARRANTY .............................................. 26 Harris Corporation, Public Safety and Professional Communications (PSPC) Business continually evaluates its technical publications for completeness, technical accuracy, and organization. You can assist in this process by submitting your comments and suggestions to the following:

Harris Corporation PSPC Business Technical Publications 221 Jefferson Ridge Parkway Lynchburg, VA 24501 Or Fax your comments to: 1-434-455-6851 Or E-mail us at: PSPC_TechPubs@harris.com 4 14221-1800-2010 1. REGULATORY AND SAFETY INFORMATION 1.1 SAFETY SYMBOL CONVENTIONS Failure The following conventions are used to alert the user to general safety precautions that must be observed during all phases of operation, service, and repair of this product. these precautions or with specific warnings elsewhere violates safety standards of design, manufacture, and intended use of the product. Harris assumes no liability for the customer's failure to comply with these standards. to comply with symbol like, which, The WARNING calls attention to a procedure, practice, or the if not correctly performed or adhered to, could result in personal injury. Do not proceed beyond a WARNING symbol until the conditions identified are fully understood or met. like, which, The CAUTION symbol calls attention to an operating procedure, practice, or the if not performed correctly or adhered to, could result in a risk of danger, damage the equipment, or severely degrade the equipment performance. to The NOTE symbol calls attention to supplemental information, which may improve system performance or clarify a process or procedure. WARNING CAUTION NOTE 14221-1800-2010 5 1.2 SAFETY TRAINING INFORMATION for and The Harris XL-200P portable radio generates RF electromagnetic energy during transmit mode. This radio is designed classified as Occupational Use Only, meaning it must be used only during the course of employment by individuals aware of the hazards and the ways to minimize such hazards. This radio is the NOT General Population an uncontrolled environment. for use by in intended WARNING the following Standards The XL-200P portable radio has been tested and complies with the FCC RF exposure limits for Occupational Use Only. In addition, this radio complies with and to RF energy and Guidelines with electromagnetic energy levels and evaluation of such levels for exposure to humans:

FCC OET Bulletin 65 Edition 97-01 Supplement C, Evaluating Compliance with FCC Guidelines for Human Exposure to Radio Frequency Electromagnetic Fields. regard American National Standards Institute (C95.1 1992), IEEE Standard for Safety Levels with Respect to Human Exposure to Radio Frequency Electromagnetic Fields, 3 kHz to 300 GHz. of American National Standards Institute (C95.3 1992), IEEE Recommended Practice for the Measurement Potentially Hazardous Electromagnetic Fields RF and Microwave. IC Standard RSS-102, Issue 4, 2010: Spectrum Management and Telecommunications Radio Standards Specification. frequency Exposure Compliance of Radio communication Apparatus (All Frequency Bands). Radio 6 14221-1800-2010 1.2.1 RF Exposure Guidelines that exposure To ensure to RF electromagnetic energy is within the FCC allowable limits for occupational use, always adhere to the following guidelines:

CAUTION DO NOT operate the radio without a proper antenna attached, as this may damage the radio and may also cause the FCC RF exposure limits to be exceeded. A proper antenna is the antenna supplied with this radio by Harris or an antenna specifically authorized by Harris for use with this radio. DO NOT transmit for more than 50% of total radio use time (50% duty cycle). Transmitting more than 50% of the time can cause FCC RF exposure compliance to be exceeded. The radio is transmitting when the TX indicator appears in the display. The radio will transmit by pressing the PTT (Push-To-

Talk) button. requirements ALWAYS transmit using low power when possible. In addition to conserving battery charge, low power can reduce RF exposure. ALWAYS use Harris authorized accessories

(antennas, batteries, belt clips, speaker/mics, etc). Use of unauthorized accessories may cause the FCC Occupational/Controlled Exposure RF compliance requirements to be exceeded. (Refer to Table 1-1.) As noted in Table 1-1, ALWAYS keep the housing of the transmitter AT LEAST 0.47 inches (1.2 cm) from the body and at least 0.98 inches (2.5 cm) from the face when transmitting to ensure FCC RF exposure compliance requirements are not exceeded. However, to provide the best sound quality to the recipients of your transmission, Harris recommends you hold the microphone at least 5 cm (2 inches) from mouth, and slightly off to one side. 14221-1800-2010 7 Table 1-1: RF Exposure Compliance Tested Distances RADIO FREQUENCY BAND VHF

(136 - 174 MHz) UHF

(378 - 522 MHz) 700/800 MHz

(768 - 776 MHz)

(798 - 806 MHz)

(806 - 816 MHz)

(851 - 861 MHz) TESTED DISTANCES

(worst case scenario) Body1 0.47 in

(1.2 cm) 0.47 in

(1.2 cm) Face 0.98 in

(2.5 cm) 0.98 in

(2.5 cm) 0.47 in

(1.2 cm) 0.98 in

(2.5 cm) 5 GHz 2400 MHz

(2412 - 2472 MHz) 0.47 in

(1.2 cm) 0.47 in

(1.2 cm)

(5.18 - 5.825 GHz) in information 0.98 in

(2.5 cm) 0.98 in

(2.5 cm) The the information needed to make the user aware of a RF exposure, and what to do to assure that this radio operates within the FCC RF exposure limits of this radio. this section provides 1.2.2 Electromagnetic Interference/Compatibility During transmissions, Harris radios generate RF energy that can possibly cause interference with other devices or systems. To avoid such interference, turn off the radios in areas where signs are posted to do so. DO NOT operate the transmitter in areas that are sensitive radiation such as hospitals, aircraft, and blasting sites. to electromagnetic 1 This is worst case based on the thinnest body mount accessory (belt clip). 8 14221-1800-2010 1.3 REGULATORY APPROVALS 1.3.1 Part 15 This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and 2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. OPERATING TIPS Industry Canada 1.3.2 This device complies with Industry Canada license-

exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. 1.4 Antenna location and condition are important when operating a portable radio. Operating the radio in low lying areas or terrain, under power lines or bridges, inside of a vehicle or in a metal framed building can severely reduce the range of the unit. Mountains can also reduce the range of the unit. In areas where transmission or reception is poor, some improvement may be obtained by ensuring the antenna is vertical. Moving a few yards in another direction or moving to a higher elevation may also improve communications. Vehicular operation can be aided with the use of an externally mounted antenna. Battery condition is another important factor in the trouble free operation of a portable radio. Always properly charge the batteries. 1.4.1 Efficient Radio Operation Keep the antenna in a vertical position when receiving or transmitting a message. 14221-1800-2010 9 WARNING 1.4.1.1 WARNING WARNING Do NOT hold onto the antenna when the radio is powered on. Antenna Care and Replacement Always keep the antenna at least 0..47 inches (1.2 cm) away from the body and 0.98 inches (2.5 cm) from the face when transmitting to ensure FCC RF compliance requirements are not exceeded. exposure Do not use the portable radio with a damaged or missing antenna. A minor burn may result if skin comes into contact with a damaged antenna. Replace antenna immediately. Operating a portable radio with the antenna missing could cause personal injury, damage the radio, violate FCC regulations. and may damaged a Use only the supplied or approved antenna. Unauthorized antennas, modifications, or attachments could cause damage to the radio unit and may violate FCC regulations. CAUTION 10 14221-1800-2010 1.4.1.2 Electronic Devices RF energy from portable radios may affect some electronic equipment. Most modern electronic equipment in cars, hospitals, homes, etc., are shielded from RF energy. However, in areas in which you are instructed to turn off two-way radio equipment, always observe the rules. If in doubt, turn it off!

CAUTION 1.4.1.3 Aircraft Always turn off a portable radio before boarding any aircraft!

Use it on the ground only with crew permission. DO NOT use while in-flight!!

WARNING 1.4.1.4 Electric Blasting Caps To prevent accidental detonation of electric blasting caps, DO NOT use two-way radios within 1000 feet of blasting operations. Always obey the

"Turn Off Two-Way Radios" signs posted where electric blasting caps are being used. (OSHA Standard:

1926.900) WARNING 14221-1800-2010 11 1.4.1.5 WARNING Potentially Explosive Atmospheres Areas with potentially explosive atmospheres are often, but not always, clearly marked. These may be fuelling areas, such as gas stations, fuel or chemical transfer or storage facilities, and areas where the air contains chemicals or particles, such as grain, dust, or metal powders. Sparks in such areas could cause an explosion or fire resulting in bodily injury or even death. Turn OFF two-way radios when in any area with a potentially explosive atmosphere. It is rare, but not impossible its that a radio or accessories could generate sparks. 12 14221-1800-2010 2. RENSEIGNEMENTS SUR LA RGLEMENTATION ET SCURIT 2.1 CONVENTIONS SUR LES SYMBOLES DE SCURIT Les conventions suivantes sont utilises dans le prsent manuel pour avertir lutilisateur des prcautions gnrales de scurit qui doivent tre observes pendant toutes les phases dopration, dentretien et de rparation de ce produit. Le non-

respect de ces prcautions ou davertissements prciss ailleurs enfreint les normes de scurit de la conception, de la fabrication et de lutilisation prvue du produit. Harris nassume aucune responsabilit pour le non-respect de ces normes par le client. sur une identifies lattention Le symbole MISE EN GARDE attire une procdure ou une pratique qui, si elle nest pas correctement effectue ou observe, pourrait entraner blessure personnelle. Ne pas poursuivre au-del dun symbole de MISE EN GARDE avant que les soient conditions compltement ou satisfaites. Le symbole AVERTISSEMENT attire lattention sur une procdure ou une pratique oprationnelle qui, si elle nest pas correctement effectue ou observe, pourrait entraner un bris dquipement ou une baisse de rendement de lquipement. importante comprises MISE EN GARDE AVERTISSEMENT 14221-1800-2010 13 REMARQUE Le symbole REMARQUE attire lattention sur des renseignements supplmentaires peuvent amliorer le rendement du systme ou clarifier un processus ou une procdure. qui 2.2 RENSEIGNEMENTS SUR LA FORMATION SUR LA SCURIT de des une produit La radio portative Harris XL-

lnergie 200P lectromagntique RF lorsquen mode de transmission. Cette radio est conue et classe pour Utilisation professionnelle seulement , ce qui signifie quelle ne doit tre utilise que dans le cadre dun emploi individus conscients des risques et des moyens de limiter ceux-ci. Cette radio NEST PAS conue pour une la Population gnrale dans un environnement non contrl. utilisation par par des MISE EN GARDE La radio portative XL-200P a t teste et est conforme aux limites dexposition aux RF de la FCC pour une Utilisation professionnelle seulement . De plus, cette radio Harris est conforme aux normes et directives suivantes quant lnergie des RF et aux niveaux dnergie lectromagntique, ainsi qu lvaluation de ces niveaux pour lexposition aux humains :

Bulletin 65 du OET de la FCC, dition 97-01, supplment C, portant sur lvaluation de la conformit aux directives de la FCC quant lexposition champs lectromagntiques des radiofrquences. humaine aux American National Standards Institute (C95.1 les niveaux 1992), norme de lIEEE sur 14 14221-1800-2010 scuritaires dexposition humaine aux champs lectromagntiques des radiofrquences, 3 kHz 300 GHz. American National Standards Institute (C95.3 1992), pratique recommande par lIEEE pour la mesure lectromagntiques potentiellement dangereux RF et micro-ondes. champs des 2.2.1 Directives sur lexposition aux RF Pour sassurer que lexposition lnergie lectromagntique des RF se situe dans les limites acceptables de lutilisation professionnelle, respectez toujours les directives suivantes :

la FCC pour AVERTISSEMENT Nutilisez PAS la radio sans quune antenne approprie y soit connecte, car ceci peut endommager la radio et galement causer un dpassement des limites dexposition aux RF de la FCC. Une antenne approprie est celle fournie par Harris avec cette radio, ou une antenne spcifiquement autorise par Harris pour tre utilise avec cette radio. Ne transmettez PAS pendant plus de 50 % de la dure dutilisation totale de la radio ( cycle de service de 50 % ). La transmission pendant plus de 50 % du temps peut causer un dpassement des exigences de conformit de la FCC en matire dexposition aux RF. La radio transmet lorsque lindicateur TX apparat sur laffichage. La radio transmet lorsquon appuie sur le bouton PTT (bouton de microphone). Transmettez TOUJOURS en basse puissance lorsque possible. En plus de prserver la charge de rduit la pile, une lexposition aux RF. faible puissance 14221-1800-2010 15 Utilisez TOUJOURS des accessoires autoriss Harris (antennes, piles, pinces de ceinture, haut-

parleurs/micros, etc.). Lutilisation daccessoires non autoriss peut entraner un dpassement des exigences de conformit pour une exposition aux RF professionnelle ou contrle de la FCC.

(Reportez-vous Tableau 2-1.) Tel quindiqu dans Tableau 2-1, conservez TOUJOURS lappareil et son antenne AU MOINS 1,2 cm (0,47 po) du corps, et au moins 2,5 cm (0,98 po) du visage pendant la transmission, pour vous assurer de ne pas dpasser les exigences de conformit de la FCC en matire dexposition aux RF. Cependant, pour offrir la meilleure qualit sonore aux auditeurs transmission, Harris recommande de tenir le microphone au moins 5 cm (2 po) de votre bouche et lgrement dplac sur un ct. votre de Tableau 2-1 : Distances de test de conformit des expositions aux RF RADIOFRQUENCES

(136 - 174 MHz) VHF UHF

(378 - 522 MHz) 700/800 MHz

(768 - 776 MHz)

(798 - 806 MHz)

(806 - 816 MHz)

(851 - 861 MHz) 2400 MHz

(2412 - 2472 MHz) 5 GHz

(5.18 - 5.825 GHz) DISTANCES TESTES

(pire des scnarios) Visage 2,5 cm Corps2 1,2 cm 1,2 cm 2,5 cm 1,2 cm 2,5 cm 1,2 cm 1,2 cm 2,5 cm 2,5 cm pour sensibiliser les renseignements Dans cette section figurent ncessaires lexposition aux RF et sur ce quil faut faire pour 2 Ce est le pire des cas base sur le corps plus mince monter accessoire (clip ceinture). lutilisateur 16 14221-1800-2010 sassurer que cette radio fonctionne dans les limites dexposition aux RF de la FCC. 2.2.2 Interfrence/Compatibilit lectromagntique Pendant les transmissions, cette radio Harris produit de lnergie des RF qui peut causer de linterfrence avec dautres appareils ou systmes. Pour viter de telles interfrences, fermez la radio dans les zones o il est le transmetteur dans des zones sensibles aux radiations lectromagntiques, comme les hpitaux, les avions et les sites de dtonation. 2.3 le faire. Nutilisez PAS indiqu de INTERFRENCE DES RADIOFRQUENCES 2.3.1 Partie 15 de la FCC Cet appareil est conforme la Partie 15 de la rglementation de la FCC. Le fonctionnement est soumis aux deux conditions suivantes :

1. Cet appareil ne doit pas causer une interfrence nuisible; et 2. Cet appareil doit accepter toute interfrence reue, y compris une interfrence qui peut causer un fonctionnement non souhait. Industrie Canada 2.3.2 Le prsent appareil est conforme aux CNR d'Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorise aux deux conditions suivantes : (1) l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et (2) l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radiolectrique subi, mme le brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre le fonctionnement. 2.4 Lemplacement et ltat de lantenne sont importants pour lutilisation dune radio portative. Lutilisation de la radio dans des zones de faible lvation, sous CONSEILS DUTILISATION si 14221-1800-2010 17 des lignes lectriques ou des ponts, lintrieur dun vhicule ou dans un immeuble ossature mtallique, peut rduire la porte de lappareil de manire considrable. Les montagnes peuvent galement rduire la porte de lunit. Dans les zones o la transmission ou la rception est insatisfaisante, certaines amliorations peuvent tre obtenues en sassurant que lantenne est verticale. Se dplacer de quelques mtres dans une autre direction ou un emplacement plus lev peut galement amliorer les communications. Lutilisation dune antenne le fonctionnement dans un vhicule. Ltat de la pile est un autre facteur important dune utilisation sans tracas dune radio portative. Chargez toujours correctement la pile. lextrieur peut fixe faciliter 2.4.1 Utilisation Efficace de la Radio Gardez lantenne dans une position verticale pendant la rception ou la transmission dun message. Ne tenez PAS lantenne lorsque la radio est allume!

MISE EN GARDE 2.4.1.1 Entretien et Remplacement de lantenne Conservez TOUJOURS lappareil et son antenne au moins 1,5 cm (0,59 po) du corps, et au moins 2,5 cm (1,0 po) du visage pendant la transmission, pour vous assurer de ne pas dpasser de conformit de la FCC en matire dexposition aux RF. exigences les 14221-1800-2010 MISE EN GARDE 18 Nutilisez pas la radio portative si son antenne est endommage ou absente. Une brlure lgre peut se produire au contact dune antenne endommage avec la peau. Remplacez immdiatement une endommage. Lutilisation radio portative alors que lantenne est absente des blessures, endommager la radio et la rglementation de la FCC. enfreindre pourrait antenne causer dune peut non Utilisez seulement lantenne fournie ou une antenne approuve. Des antennes des modifications ou des ajouts une antenne peuvent endommager la radio et enfreindre la rglementation de la FCC. autorises, MISE EN GARDE AVERTISSEMENT 2.4.1.2 Appareils lectroniques lquipement les voitures, Lnergie des RF provenant de radios portatives peut affecter certains appareils lectroniques. La majorit de lectronique moderne dans les hpitaux, les maisons, etc. est blind contre lnergie des RF. Cependant, dans les zones o lon vous demande de fermer lquipement de radio bidirectionnelle, respectez toujours les rgles. En cas de doute, teignez-

le!

AVERTISSEMENT 14221-1800-2010 19 2.4.1.3 Avion teignez toujours une radio portative avant dembarquer bord dun avion!

Ne lutilisez au sol quavec la permission de lquipage. NE lutilisez PAS durant le vol!

MISE EN GARDE 2.4.1.4 Dtonateurs lectriques des 305 m

(1 000 pi) de la dtonation Pour prvenir accidentelle dtonateurs lectriques, nutilisez PAS de radios bidirectionnelles moins de des oprations dtonation. Respectez toujours les indications teindre radios bidirectionnelles situes l o des dtonateurs lectriques sont utiliss. OSHA :

1926.900)

(Norme les MISE EN GARDE 20 14221-1800-2010 2.4.1.5 Atmosphre Potentiellement Explosive en chimiques clairement Les zones ayant une atmosphre sont potentiellement explosive souvent, mais pas toujours, identifies comme telles. Il peut sagir de zones dalimentation carburant, comme les postes dessence, les installations de stockage ou de transfert de carburant ou de produits chimiques, ainsi que les lair contient des zones dont produits ou des particules, comme des grains, de la poussire ou des poudres mtalliques. Des tincelles dans de telles zones peuvent provoquer une explosion ou un incendie, causant ainsi des blessures ou mme la mort. teignez radios bidirectionnelles dans toute zone ayant atmosphre potentiellement explosive. Il est rare, mais pas impossible quune radio accessoires produisent des tincelles. une ses les ou MISE EN GARDE 3. OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES A complete list of Options and Accessories approved for use with the XL-200P portable radio can be found online in the Operators Manual 14221-1800-2000 at www.pspc.harris.com. the maintenance manual or Harris Products and Services Catalog for all available options and accessories, including those items that do not adversely affect the RF energy exposure. reference Also 14221-1800-2010 21 use Harris Always authorized accessories (antennas, batteries, belt clips, speaker/mics, etc). Use of unauthorized accessories may cause the FCC Occupational/Controlled Exposure compliance requirements to be exceeded. RF etc.)

(battery, for Always use the correct options and accessories antenna, speaker/mic, radio. Immersion rated options must be used with radio. Intrinsically safe options must be used with intrinsically safe radios. immersion rated the an WARNING CAUTION 4. BATTERY PACKS The XL-200P series portable radios use rechargeable, recyclable Nickel Metal Hydride (NiMH), Lithium-

Polymer (Li-Poly), or Lithium-Ion (Li-Ion) battery packs. Please to maximize the useful life of each type of battery pack. the directions below follow safety Do not disassemble or modify Lithium battery packs. The Lithium battery packs are equipped with built-in protection features. Should these features be disabled or tampered with in any way, the battery pack can leak electrolyte, overheat, emit smoke, burst, and/or ignite. and If the battery pack is ruptured or is leaking electrolyte that results in skin or eye contact with the electrolyte, immediately flush the affected area with water. If the battery electrolyte gets in the eyes, flush with water for 15 minutes and consult a physician immediately. WARNING WARNING 22 14221-1800-2010 CAUTION 4.1 Always use Harris authorized chargers and conditioners. Use of unauthorized chargers and conditioners may void the warranty. CONDITIONING NIMH BATTERY PACKS Condition a new NiMH battery pack before putting into use. This also applies to rechargeable NiMH battery packs that have been stored for long periods

(weeks, months, or longer). Conditioning requires fully charging and fully discharging the battery pack three (3) times using the tri-chemistry charger. The first time the battery pack is put into the charger, this unit will condition Nickel-based battery packs by automatically charging and discharging (cycling) the battery. Refer to the appropriate charger manual for details. Failure to properly condition NiMH battery packs before initial use will result in shortened performance by the battery. CONDITIONING LITHIUM BATTERY PACKS CAUTION 4.2 Lithium-based battery packs do not suffer from memory effect and require conditioning. 4.3 STORING LI-ION BATTERY PACKS therefore do not If a battery pack is expected to be idle for a month or more, it should be properly prepared. Li-Ion battery packs should not be stored fully charged. Before storing the battery pack, discharge it to 40% capacity. If the battery is not discharged prior to storage, its overall capacity may be reduced. Although all battery packs experience some capacity loss during storage, the shelf life for Li-Ion battery packs is about 3 months. However, note that any capacity drop 14221-1800-2010 23 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION which occurs during storage is permanent and cannot be reversed. Li-Ion battery packs should be purchased and used immediately. They should not be stock-piled without a rotating stock plan. 4.4 For more information regarding the proper care of portable radio battery packs or establishing a battery maintenance program, refer to ECR-7367 which may be ordered by calling toll free 1-800-368-3277

(international via https://premier.pspc.harris.com/infocenter/. 4.5 BATTERY DISPOSAL 1-434-455-6403) or

-

In no instance should a battery pack be incinerated. Disposing of a battery pack by burning will cause an explosion. CAUTION into RECHARGEABLE BATTERY PACK DISPOSAL The product you have purchased contains a rechargeable battery pack. The battery pack is recyclable. At the end of its useful life, under various state and local laws, it may be illegal to dispose of this battery pack the municipal waste stream. Check with your local solid waste officials for details in your area for recycling options or proper disposal. Canadian and U.S. users may call Toll Free 1-

800-8-BATTERY for information and/or procedures for returning rechargeable batteries in your locality. 24 14221-1800-2010 5. TECHNICAL ASSISTANCE The Technical Assistance Center's (TACs) resources are available to help with overall system operation, maintenance, upgrades and product support. TAC is your point of contact when answers are needed to technical questions. Product specialists, with detailed knowledge of product operation, maintenance, and repair, provide technical support via a toll-free (in North America) telephone number. Support is also available through mail, fax and e-mail. For more information about technical assistance services, contact your sales representative, or call the Technical Assistance Center directly at:

North America:

International:

Fax:

E-mail:

1-800-528-7711 1-434-385-2400 1-434-455-6712 PSPC_tac@harris.com 14221-1800-2010 25 6. WARRANTY 1-800-368-3277 1-321-409-4393 If any part of the system equipment is damaged on arrival, contact the shipper to conduct an inspection and prepare a damage report. Save the shipping container and all packing materials until the inspection and the damage report are completed. In addition, contact the Customer Care center to make arrangements for replacement equipment. Do not return any part of the shipment until you receive detailed instructions from a Harris representative. North America:

Phone Number:

Fax Number:

E-mail: PSPC_CustomerFocus@harris.com International:

Phone Number:

Fax Number:

E-mail:

PSPC_InternationalCustomerFocus@harris.com Please register this product within 10 days of purchase. Registration validates the warranty coverage, and enables Harris to contact you in case of any safety notifications issued for this product. Registration can be made on-line at the Customer Care center webpage:

http://www.pspc.harris.com/Service/Customerservice

.aspx. While on the webpage, please review the applicable battery and/or product warranty literature. 1-434-455-6403 1-321-409-4394 26 14221-1800-2010 Harris Corporation 221 Jefferson Ridge Parkway

| Lynchburg, VA USA 24501 www.pspc.harris.com | 1-800-528-7711